JP6623625B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  For pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry area provided in the game area, and the display of the pattern is displayed on the display device. In such a case, there is known a configuration in which a transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player when the game state becomes. And when it shifts to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to make the flow form of the game balls in the game area preferable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of making a flowing form of a game ball preferable.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes a specific ball entry section into which a game ball flowing down a game area can enter,
A predetermined ball entry portion provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot enter ;
When a switching opportunity is generated based on a game ball having entered the specific ball entry section, the predetermined ball entry section is changed from the second state to the first state, and the predetermined state is the first state. Means capable of causing the predetermined ball entry section to be in the second state in response to a game ball having entered the ball entry section;
Any one of a plurality of types of distribution directions including a first distribution direction and a second distribution direction, in which the supplied game ball is provided on the upstream side of the specific ball entry portion and the predetermined ball entry portion in the game area. Distribution means for sequentially changing the distribution direction when the game balls are supplied, and
With
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. In such a case, a game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entry section,
A configuration in which a game ball supplied to the distribution unit after one game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution unit is distributed in the first distribution direction,
The time required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where a game ball can enter the specific ball entry portion from a predetermined height position is the distribution time. Means that the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the means is longer than a period required from the predetermined height position to reach a position where the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion. A passage configuration from the distributing means to the specific ball entry portion and a passage configuration from the distributing device to the predetermined ball entry portion are set.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to make the flow-down aspect of a game ball preferable.

It is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the composition of a game board. (A) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st special figure prize winning device in a non-accepting state, and (b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the 1st special figure prize winning device in an accepting state. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. It is a longitudinal section for explaining the internal configuration of the branch winning device. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right side area. It is the side view of a 1st distribution mechanism, and the longitudinal section around the 1st distribution mechanism concerned. (A)-(c) It is a front view of the rotating body for distribution. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a game ball is guided by the 1st distribution mechanism and the 2nd distribution mechanism. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a success / failure lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st special figures, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd special figures. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of each big hit result. (A1) to (f1) are time charts showing the winning modes of the game balls in the first high probability state, and (a2) to (f2) are time charts showing the winning modes of the game balls in the second high probability state. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose power control process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the normal figure fluctuation | variation performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the electric power operation performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of the 1st special figure prize winning device performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of the 2nd special figure prize winning device performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows winning detection processing performed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure change start process performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the normal figure fluctuation | variation performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right area in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right area in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a game ball is guide | induced by a 1st distribution mechanism. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows the winning mode of a game ball in a high frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose power control process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the normal figure fluctuation | variation performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the electric power operation performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a display continuation period acquisition process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process performed by MPU of a sound light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game start process performed by MPU of a sound light emission control apparatus. (A) to (c) show a flow of a game in a case where a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism in the shortest firing cycle in the high frequency support mode and a game cycle corresponding to a departure result is continuous. It is a time chart. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right area in 5th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”) that is a type of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, but may be a configuration in which the outer frame 11 is provided in an island facility of a game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. More specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation tip side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on a cylinder lock 16 provided to be exposed at the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is almost the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially oval window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area PA formed on the front face of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 17 so that almost the entire game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window 17 has a substantially elliptical shape, and has a window panel 17a fitted therein. The window panel 17a is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this. The window panel 17a may be formed to be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the game area PA is formed through the window panel 17a from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It may be formed colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

  Above the window 17, a display light emitting unit 18a is provided. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 18b for outputting a sound effect or the like according to a game state is provided. Below the window 17, an upper swelling portion 19a and a lower swelling portion 19b swelling toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 19a, and a lower plate that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 19b. The upper plate has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding the game balls to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate.

  The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of an outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail. The game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached to the resin base 21 below the window hole 23 are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a to the launch rail 27a, and launching. A solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator for firing game balls supplied on the rail 27a toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the driving of the solenoid 27c is controlled, and a game ball is fired.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general prize section 31, a first special figure normal prize section 32, a first special figure prize apparatus 33, a second special figure prize apparatus 34, a special electric prize apparatus 35, a through prize section 36, a branch prize apparatus 37, A variable display unit 40, a special figure unit 45, and a general-purpose display unit 46 are provided.

  The payout of the game ball is not executed even if the ball enters the through winning unit 36. On the other hand, the general prize section 31, the first special figure normal prize section 32, the first special figure prize apparatus 33, the second special figure prize apparatus 34, the special electric prize apparatus 35, and the branch prize apparatus 37 are determined when a ball is generated. Payout of a number of game balls is executed. Specifically, the number of prize balls is determined when a ball is entered into any of the first special figure normal prize section 32, the first special figure prize apparatus 33, the second special figure prize apparatus 34, and the branch prize apparatus 37. Payout of three prize balls is executed, and in the event that a ball enters the general prize section 31, the payout of ten prize balls is executed, and in the event that a ball enters the special prize winning device 35. , 15 payout balls are paid out.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various prize sections or the like are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only in a mode of being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, the general winning section 31, the first special figure normal winning section 32, the first special figure winning apparatus 33, and the second special The entry of the ball into the prize winning device 34, the special prize winning device 35, the through winning unit 36, and the branch winning device 37 is also referred to as winning.

  The variable display unit 40 is provided so as to include the center of the game area PA. Since the periphery of the variable display unit 40 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game balls fired in the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA1 which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 40, and the lower area is continuous with the upper area PA1 below the upper area PA1. A left area PA2 which is a left area, a right area PA3 which is continuous below the upper area PA1 and which is a right area of the variable display unit 40, and a left area PA2 and a right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 which is an area below the variable display unit 40 continuously below the variable display unit 40.

  When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is located to the left of the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. Flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the left area PA2, and the lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, the upper region PA1 is positioned rightward of the lateral center position. A game ball flows down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the right area PA3, and the lower area PA4. That is, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the firing operation device 28, and at the same time, adjusts the right operation area. A game can be played so that a game ball flows down the PA3. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper area PA1 → the right area PA3 → the lower area PA4.

  The first special map normal winning section 32 is provided in the lower area PA4. The first special figure normal winning section 32 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening / closing member for preventing game balls from entering the first special figure normal winning section 32 is provided. In a situation where the game balls are fired in the same manner, the probability of winning in the first special figure normal winning section 32 is constant without depending on the game state. In other words, in the first special figure normal prize section 32, game balls flowing down the game area PA toward the first special figure normal prize section 32 can always enter. The first special figure normal winning section 32 is disposed directly below the stage 40 a formed on the variable display unit 40, and the game ball that has flowed into the stage 40 a via the guide path formed on the variable display unit 40. The game balls discharged from the center of the stage 40a to the outside of the variable display unit 40 can easily enter the first special figure normal winning section 32. The first special map normal winning section 32 is provided with a detection sensor 32a, and the detection sensor 32a detects a game ball that has won the first special figure normal winning section 32.

  Here, as described above, the first special figure normal winning section 32 is provided in the lower area PA4, but the first special figure normal winning section 32 is located on the upstream side toward the right area PA3 with respect to the right side. The control nail 24c is provided so that the game ball flowing down the area PA3 cannot reach the first special figure normal winning section 32. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 40a is provided for the left area PA2, and is not provided for the right area PA3. With these configurations, when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is possible to win the first special figure normal winning section 32, but the right area PA3 is played. When the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the ball flows down, it is impossible to win the first special figure normal winning section 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since the regulation nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 40a is provided for the right area PA3, the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Even if the firing operation device 28 is operated so as to perform the prize, the first special figure normal prize section 32 may be awarded.

  The first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are installed in the right area PA3. That is, the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 cannot win when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the right area PA3. When the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down, a prize can be won.

  The configuration of the first special figure prize winning device 33 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a longitudinal sectional view of the first special figure prize winning device 33 in a non-accepting state. Note that the configuration of the second special figure prize winning device 34 is the same as the configuration of the first special figure prize winning device 33, and in the following description, when describing each member of the second special figure prize winning device 34, the first special figure prize winning device will be described. The reference numerals of 33 corresponding members are used as they are.

  The first special figure prize winning device 33 discharges the game ball flowing from the game area PA to the base unit 51 having the discharge passage 53 formed for discharging the game ball from the game area 24 to the rear of the game board 24. A guiding unit 52 for guiding to the passage 53. The entrance 53a of the discharge passage 53 has an opening area equal to or more than one game ball, and is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 54 is provided on the exit 53b side of the discharge passage 53, and the detection sensor 54 detects a game ball that has won the first special figure prize winning device 33.

  The guiding unit 52 receives a game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 53 a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 53 and into the discharge passage 53. A guide drive unit 56 for displacing the guide member 55 between an initial position where the game ball cannot be guided and a guide position where the guide can be performed (hereinafter, the guide drive unit of the first special figure prize device 33). 56 is also referred to as a first special figure prize driving unit 56a, the guide driving unit 56 of the second special figure prize winning device 34 is also referred to as a second special figure prize driving unit 56b), and the guide member 55 is disposed at an initial position. In a situation where the guide balls 55 are arranged at the blocking position where the game balls are prevented from flowing into the discharge passage 53 in the situation where the guide balls 55 are arranged at the guide position, the flow of the game balls into the discharge passages 53 is not blocked. It includes a blocking member 57 arranged in the location, the. The guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction such that the guide member 55 is located below. A transmission unit 58 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 56 to the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57.

  When the guide driving unit 56 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 53 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game balls flowing down the area in front of the entrance 53a of the discharge passage 53 in the game area PA are not guided into the discharge passage 53 by the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57. The ball flows down the game area PA without entering the special figure winning device 33. Further, since the blocking member 57 is located at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the entrance 53a of the discharge passage 53 is less than one game ball. Thereby, in the situation where the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game balls from entering the first special figure winning device 33.

  When the guide driving unit 56 is in the driving state, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, and the guide member 55 is arranged at the guiding position and the blocking member 57 is not moved. It is located in the blocking position. FIG. 4B is a longitudinal sectional view of the first special figure prize winning device 33 in the guiding state.

  When the guide member 55 is located at the guide position, the distal end side of the guide member 55 protrudes from the entrance 53a of the discharge passage 53 toward the game area PA. The amount of protrusion is such that a game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 53a in the game area PA can be received from below. Since the top surface of the guide member 55 is inclined downward toward the entrance 53 a of the discharge passage 53, the game balls received from below at the front end of the guide member 55 are not covered by the top surface of the guide member 55. And is guided into the discharge passage 53. When the blocking member 57 is located at the non-blocking position, the blocking member 57 is displaced so that its tip is located above the blocking position. The ball flows into the discharge passage 53 without interfering with the blocking member 57. As a result, when the guide driving unit 56 is driven, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 53a in the game area PA enters the first special figure prize winning device 33.

  Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the first special drawing is a state in which the guide driving unit 56 of the first special drawing winning device 33 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position. This is referred to as a non-accepted state of the prize winning device 33 (or a closed state of the first special figure prize winning device 33 or a non-guided state of the first special figure prize winning device 33), and the guide driving unit 56 of the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in a driving state. The state in which the guide member 55 is arranged at the guide position and the blocking member 57 is arranged in the non-blocking position is defined as the receiving state of the first special figure winning device 33 (or the open state of the first special figure winning device 33, the first state). The state of the special figure prize winning device 33 is called. The guide driving unit 56 of the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in a non-driving state, and the state in which the guide member 55 is located at the initial position and the blocking member 57 is located at the blocking position is referred to as the second special figure winning prize device 34. This is referred to as a non-acceptance state (or a closed state of the second special figure prize winning device 34 or a non-guided state of the second special figure prize winning device 34). The state in which the 55 is located at the guiding position and the blocking member 57 is located in the non-blocking position is determined by the receiving state of the second special figure prize winning device 34 (or the open state of the second special figure prize winning device 34, the second special figure winning prize 34 induction state).

  The first special figure prize winning device 33 includes a cover member 59 provided so as to face the entrance 53 a of the discharge passage 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 59 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage portion 59a in a region in front of the entrance portion 53a in the game region PA, and allows one game ball to pass through the front region of the entrance portion 53a at the same time. It is provided so as to restrict the movement of the game ball to the front and the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10 as well as the number of the game balls. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 53 of the first special figure winning device 33 when the guiding unit 52 of the first special figure winning device 33 is in the guiding state. In addition, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front area of the entrance 53a into the discharge passage 53 in the guiding state. On the other hand, when the guiding unit 52 of the first special figure winning device 33 is in the non-guiding state, the game balls flowing into the passage portion 59a of the cover member 59 pass vertically without flowing into the entrance portion 53a. I do. This game ball continues flowing down the game area PA as it is.

  A winning lottery is performed based on the winning of the first special figure winning device 33, and a winning lottery is performed based on the winning of the second special figure winning device 34. Further, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a prize has occurred in the first special figure normal prize section 32 provided in the lower area PA4. When the winning lottery is performed, the special figure unit 45 displays the change of the picture, and finally the result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed.

  As for the special figure unit 45, as shown in FIG. 3, the special figure unit 45 is provided at the lower right corner which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The special figure unit 45 is provided with a first special figure display section 45a and a second special figure display section 45b. In the first special figure display section 45a, the winning pattern is displayed based on the fact that a prize has occurred in the first special figure normal prize section 32 or the first special figure prize winning device 33, so that the display of the pattern is changed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In the second special figure display unit 45b, the winning pattern is displayed based on the winning of the second special figure prize winning device 34, so that the display of the pattern is changed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

  In addition, the first special figure display unit 45a and the second special figure display unit 45b are configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined mode, but it is not limited to this. Instead, it may be constituted by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the first special figure display section 45a and the second special figure display section 45b, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters , Or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are displayed.

  In the special figure unit 45, a first special figure reservation display part 45c and a second special figure reservation display part 45d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 45a and the second special figure display part 45b. . The number of game balls that have won the first special figure normal prize section 32 or the first special figure prize winning device 33 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the retained number is displayed by lighting of the first special figure reservation display section 45c. It has become. The number of game balls that have won the second special figure prize winning device 34 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the number of the reserved numbers is displayed by turning on the second special figure reservation display part 45d.

  Incidentally, the display range of the first special figure display section 45a is smaller than the display surface of the symbol display device 41 described later. The display range of the second special figure display section 45b is a range narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the display range of both the first special figure display unit 45a and the second special figure display unit 45b is smaller than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the entire display range of the first special figure display unit 45a, the second special figure display unit 45b, the first special figure reservation display unit 45c, and the second special figure reservation display unit 45d is also displayed on the symbol display device 41. The area is narrower than the plane. Thereby, the attention degree of the player to the symbol display device 41 is higher than the first special figure display unit 45a, the second special figure display unit 45b, the first special figure reservation display unit 45c, and the second special figure reservation display unit 45d. It is possible to increase.

  When the variation display of the picture is performed in the first special figure display unit 45a, the display effect is performed in the symbol display device 41 provided in the variable display unit 40 in accordance therewith, and in the second special figure display unit 45b. Even in the case where the variation display of the pattern is performed, the display effect is performed in the symbol display device 41 in accordance therewith. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect in accordance with the variable display in the special figure display units 45a and 45b, but also the display effect in the open / close execution mode and the display effect in the demonstration display, which shifts after winning. Is performed.

  More specifically, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display device. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when the variation display of the pattern is started on the first special figure display unit 45a, the effect for the game round is started, and when the variation display of the pattern is finished on the first special figure display unit 45a. The effect for the game round ends. Further, in the symbol display device 41, when the variation display of the pattern is started in the second special figure display section 45b, the effect for the game round is started, and the variation display of the pattern is ended in the second special figure display section 45b. In this case, the effect for the game round ends.

  With reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, display contents in the case where an effect for a game round is performed on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail. FIG. 5 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (j), the pattern, which is a kind of pattern, is composed of nine types of main patterns to which numbers “1” to “9” are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character designs such as an octopus are numbered "1" to "9" to form a main design.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, three symbols are stopped and displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed. The display is stopped. As shown in FIG. 6A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right down line L4, and a right up line L5 are displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Is set.

  When symbols are displayed in a variable manner as a game effect on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, the variable display is started so that the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity. You. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and the process is ended in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of symbols is finished, if the result of the internal lottery is a 16R second high-accuracy correspondence result described later, the same odd symbol combination is formed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. . If the result of the internal lottery is a first high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, a second high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, or a low-accuracy correspondence result to be described later, the same even number is displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. A combination of symbols is formed.

  It should be noted that, based on a prize to the first special figure normal prize section 32, the first special figure prize apparatus 33 or the second special figure prize apparatus 34, one of the special figure display sections 45a and 45b and the symbol display apparatus 41. The start of the variable display, the display of a predetermined result, and the end of the variable display correspond to one game. In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are variably displayed as the symbol may be employed.

  If a jackpot is won by a lottery based on a prize to the first special figure prize unit 32, the first special figure prize apparatus 33 or the second special figure prize apparatus 34, the prize to the special electric prize apparatus 35 is The mode shifts to a possible opening / closing execution mode. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 below the first special figure normal winning portion 32 and above the out port 24a. The position where the special electric prize winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 is set such that the gaming operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. It is a position where a prize is possible regardless of whether the firing operation device 28 is operated.

  The special electric winning device 35 has a large winning opening (not shown) communicating with the back side of the game board 24 and an opening / closing door 35a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 35a is arranged in one of a closed state and an open state by being driven by the driving unit 35b for special power. Specifically, the opening / closing door 35a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can be won in the open / close execution mode. In the closed state, a prize may not be impossible, but a prize may be less likely to occur than in the open state. The special power winning device 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35c, and a game ball that has won the special power winning device 35 is detected by the detection sensor 35c.

  The internal lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the opening / closing execution mode is executed when the first special figure prize winning device 33 or the second special figure prize winning device 34 wins, as described above. As described above, the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 can be switched between a non-accepting state in which game balls cannot be won and an accepting state in which game balls can be won. Configuration. In this configuration, when the first special figure prize winning device 33 is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state and when the second special figure prize winning device 34 is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state, the game ball is transferred to the branch winning device 37. Generated by winning. The branch winning device 37 is provided so as to be switchable between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter as described later in detail. The trigger for switching the branch prize device 37 from the closed state to the open state occurs when a game ball wins the through prize unit 36.

  The through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 are provided in the right area PA3. That is, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the through-prize unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 cannot win, and the game ball flows down the right area PA3. When the firing operation device 28 is operated as described above, a prize can be won.

  The through prize portion 36 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, a prize in the through prize portion 36 occurs. The through winning unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor 36a, and the detection sensor 36a detects a game ball that has won the through winning unit 36.

  The branch winning device 37 is switched to the open state based on the winning in the through winning unit 36. More specifically, with the winning in the through winning unit 36 as a trigger, the variation display of the pattern is performed on the general-purpose display unit 46. More specifically, the general-purpose display unit 46 is provided at the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The general-purpose display unit 46 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be constituted by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the ordinary figure display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors May be displayed.

  In the general-purpose display section 46, a variation display of the picture is performed based on the occurrence of the prize in the through prize section 36. Then, in the case of a first high probability state or a second high probability state, which will be described later, a result corresponding to the branch winning device 37 being opened when the variable display of the pattern ends is displayed. In the case of the low probability state, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning in the through winning unit 36, and the display of the pattern is started to be changed in the general-purpose display unit 46. If the result of the internal lottery is a winning, the result corresponding to the opening of the branch winning device 37 is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is finished, and if the result of the internal lottery is out, the pattern of the pattern is displayed. When the variable display ends, a result corresponding to the fact that the branch winning device 37 is not in the open state is displayed.

  It should be noted that the number of winnings in the through winning unit 36 is not stored on hold. In other words, when a prize is generated in the through prize winning section 36 in a situation where the variation display of the pattern can be started on the general figure display section 46, the variation display of the pattern is displayed on the general figure display section 46 based on the winning. Is started, but even if a prize is generated in the through prize winning section 36 in a situation where it is impossible to start the variable display of the picture on the ordinary figure display section 46, the prize is invalidated and the prize is invalidated. No processing is performed.

  The configuration of the branch winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 in addition to FIG. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the branch winning device 37.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the branch winning device 37 has a branch entrance 61 large enough to allow game balls to pass therethrough, and a closed state in which game balls cannot pass through the branch entrance 61 and a game ball passing therethrough. A branch-side opening / closing member 62 for switching to a possible open state is provided. The branch side opening / closing member 62 is opened by being driven by a branch entrance drive unit 63 through a link mechanism (not shown).

  After the game ball that has won the branch entrance 61 is guided to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, as shown in FIG. 7, the game ball enters the branch passage 65 formed in the base body 64 of the branch winning device 37. Derived. The branch passage 65 has an inlet region 65a formed to extend vertically downward from an inlet portion of the branch passage 65 and a downstream end of the inlet region 65a. An upstream passage area 65b set to be inclined downward in the lateral direction, and a first lead-out area 65c which is continuous with the downstream end of the upstream passage area 65b and whose passage direction is set vertically downward. And a second derivation region 65d that is provided by branching from a middle position of the first derivation region 65c, and a first derivation region that is continuous with each downstream end of the first derivation region 65c and the second derivation region 65d. There is provided a discharge area 65e for discharging game balls that have passed through 65c and game balls that have passed through second lead-out area 65d to the back side of game board 24.

  Each of the entrance area 65a, the upstream passage area 65b, the first lead-out area 65c, and the second lead-out area 65d has a dimension in a direction orthogonal to the passage direction equal to or more than one game ball and less than two game balls. It has become. This prevents the game balls from passing through these areas 65a to 65d in a state where a plurality of game balls are arranged in a direction orthogonal to the passage direction.

  At a boundary between the entrance area 65a and the upstream passage area 65b, there is provided a branch winning detection sensor 66a for detecting a game ball which has won the branch winning device 37. The branch winning detection sensor 66a is an electromagnetic induction type sensor, and outputs a HI level signal to a main control device 101, which will be described later, when a game ball exists in the detection area, and the game ball exists in the detection area. If there is no such signal, a LOW level signal is output to main controller 101 described later. The type of the branch winning detection sensor 66a is arbitrary, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  When the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of a game ball from the branch winning detection sensor 66a, the payout of three game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls for winning to the branch winning device 37 is executed. Is executed. Specifically, a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is transmitted to a payout control device 107 described later. As described above, the branch winning detection sensor 66a is provided in the entrance area 65a, and when a game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, the payout of the game ball corresponding to the winning in the branch winning device 37 is executed. In this case, the payout of the game balls can be executed immediately when the winning in the branch winning device 37 occurs.

  A switching piece 67 for guiding a game ball flowing into the first derivation area 65c to the second derivation area 65d is provided at a branch point of the first derivation area 65c to the second derivation area 65d. The switching piece 67 is rotatably supported in a region of the base body 64 opposite to the second lead-out region 65d with respect to the first lead-out region 65c, and is entirely retracted outside the first lead-out region 65c. It is possible to be displaced between the retracted position and the guidance position protruding into the first lead-out area 65c. The driving force of the switching drive unit 68 is transmitted to the switching piece 67 via a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive unit 68 is in the non-drive state, the switching piece 67 is disposed at the retracted position by the urging force of an urging means such as a spring (not shown), and the switching drive unit 68 is in the driven state. The switching piece 67 is displaced against the urging force and is arranged at the guiding position.

  When the switching piece 67 is located at the evacuation position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 65 flows down the first lead-out area 65c without being guided to the second lead-out area 65d. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear side of the game board 24 through the discharge region 65e after being detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b provided downstream of the branching position of the switching piece 67 in the first lead-out region 65c. You. On the other hand, when the switching piece 67 is located at the guidance position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 65 is received by the switching piece 67 from below. The upper surface of the switching piece 67 in a state where the switching piece 67 is located at the guidance position is inclined downward toward the second lead-out area 65d. Thus, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 67 flows into the second lead-out area 65d by its own weight, and flows down the second lead-out area 65d. Then, the game ball is discharged to the back side of the game board 24 through the discharge region 65e after being detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c provided in the second lead-out region 65d.

  The first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity detection sensor 66c are electromagnetic induction type sensors, and output an HI level signal to a main control device 101, which will be described later, when a game ball is present in the detection area. When there is no game ball in the area, a LOW level signal is output to main controller 101 described later. The types of the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger detection sensor 66c are arbitrary, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  Even if the main control device 101 receives the signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the main control device 101 does not execute the process for paying out the game ball. Similarly, even if the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of a game ball from the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the main control device 101 does not execute a process for paying out the game ball. On the other hand, as described above, main controller 101 executes processing for paying out game balls when a signal corresponding to detection of a game ball is received from branch winning detection sensor 66a. In other words, when a prize is generated in the branch prize device 37, the winning game ball is immediately detected by the branch prize detection sensor 66a, so that processing for paying out the game ball is executed. Then, after the processing is executed, the game ball is detected by one of the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. Accordingly, when a prize is generated in the branch prize device 37, the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger are executed while immediately executing a process for paying out the game balls. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing a path configuration until a game ball is detected by any of the detection sensors 66c.

  When receiving a signal corresponding to the detection of a game ball from the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the main control device 101 basically executes a process for bringing the first special figure prize winning device 33 into an accepting state. Thereby, it is possible to win the first special map winning device 33. Further, when receiving a signal corresponding to the detection of a game ball from the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the main control device 101 basically executes a process for setting the second special figure prize winning device 34 to an acceptance state. Thereby, it is possible to win the second special figure winning device 34.

  The internal space of the branch winning device 37 is formed by assembling the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 (see FIG. 3) back and forth. The transparent cover 69 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The transparent cover 69 forms a passage wall of the branch passage 65 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The switching piece 67 exists at a position between the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69. The surface of the transparent cover 69 is exposed on the front side of the game board 24 as shown in FIG. More specifically, the transparent cover 69 is provided such that the surface of the transparent cover 69 is flush with the area around the transparent cover 69 on the game board 24. That is, the surface of the transparent cover 69 forms a part of the game area PA. By providing the transparent cover 69 in this manner, the game balls flowing into the branch winning device 37 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The operating position of the switching piece 67 is also visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, it is also possible to visually recognize from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether the game ball flowing into the branch winning device 37 is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b or the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. However, since the branch entrance drive unit 63 and the switching drive unit 68 are provided on the back side of the base body 64, they are not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The branch winning detection sensor 66a, the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, and the second opportunity detection sensor 66c are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but some or all of these detection sensors 66a to 66c are invisible. It is good also as a structure which has become.

  The branch winning device 37 is mounted on the game board 24 from the back side of the gaming board 24, and the screw fixing portion of the branch winning device 37 to the game board 24 exists on the back side of the game board 24. . Therefore, in order to remove the branch winning device 37 from the game board 24, it is necessary to perform an operation of releasing the screw fixing from the back side of the game board 24. In addition, the screw fixing portion is set so that a release operation for fixing the screw between the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 can be performed when the branch winning device 37 is removed from the game board 24. Therefore, when separating the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 during maintenance of the branch winning device 37, it is necessary to first remove the branch winning device 37 from the back side of the game board 24. This makes it difficult to perform an operation of illegally removing the transparent cover 69 from the base body 64.

  Next, the flow of the game ball in the right area PA3 of the game area PA will be described. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the right side area PA3 in an enlarged manner.

  As described above, the first special figure prize winning device 33, the second special figure prize winning device 34, the through winning unit 36, and the branch winning device 37 are provided in the right area PA3. The first special figure prize device 33, the second special figure prize device 34, the through prize portion 36, and the branch prize device 37 are all arranged at a position in the vertical direction of the right side area PA3. Is arranged on the left side, the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is located on the center side in the horizontal direction, and the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are arranged on the right side.

  In the right side area PA3, on the upstream side of the first special figure prize winning device 33, the second special figure prize winning device 34, the through prize winning portion 36 and the branch prize winning device 37, the game balls flowing from the upper region PA1 into the right side region PA3 are passed through. A distribution unit 70 for sequentially allocating to the winning section 36 side, the branch entrance 61 side of the branch winning apparatus 37, and the first special figure winning apparatus 33 and the second special figure winning apparatus 34 side is provided. . The distribution unit 70 includes a first distribution mechanism 71 and a second distribution mechanism 72. The configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71 will be described. FIG. 9 is a side view of the first distribution mechanism 71 and a longitudinal sectional view around the first distribution mechanism 71. Note that the configuration of the second distribution mechanism 72 is the same as the configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71, and in the following description, the description of each member of the second distribution mechanism 72 corresponds to that of the first distribution mechanism 71. The code of each member is used as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first distribution mechanism 71 includes a distribution rotator 81 for distributing game balls flowing from the upstream. FIGS. 10A to 10C are front views of the rotator 81 for distribution. As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C, the distribution rotator 81 includes a shaft 82 and is located at a central position in the axial direction of the shaft 82 with respect to the shaft 82. The ball distribution portion 83 is integrally formed so as to project outward. The ball distribution portion 83 extends outside the shaft portion 82 over the entire circumference around the axis.

  The distributing rotator 81 is arranged so that the axis of the shaft 82 is horizontal and horizontal to the pachinko machine 10, and the shaft 82 is received by a bearing (not shown). It is supported rotatably about the axial direction of the portion 82. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9, the shaft portion 82 of the rotator 81 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the game board 24. The portion of the portion 83 that is located forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the shaft portion 82 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 through an opening 24 d formed in the game board 24. Since the distance between the portion of the ball sorting unit 83 that projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 and the peripheral edge of the opening 24d is less than the radius of the game ball, the game ball flowing down the game area PA may It is configured not to be caught between the ball sorting portion 83 and the peripheral portion of the opening 24d.

  A game ball that flows down the game area PA and is guided above the ball sorting unit 83 collides with a portion of the ball sorting unit 83 projecting forward from the pachinko machine 10 from above. . Although the detailed configuration will be described later, the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting unit 83 is formed so that the collision force from above is used as the rotation force of the sorting rotator 81. Therefore, each time a game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, the distribution rotating body 81 rotates in a predetermined direction. This predetermined direction is a counterclockwise direction viewed in the state of FIG.

  In this manner, the rotator 81 for distribution rotates in a predetermined direction each time a game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, but only one rotation of 120 ° due to the collision of one game ball. The rotation amount is limited so that the body 81 rotates, and the rotation position of the distribution rotating body 81 is held at the position where the rotation amount is limited. Specifically, the first distribution mechanism 71 includes a rotation restricting piece 84. The rotation restricting piece 84 is provided at a position on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the distribution rotating body 81. The rotation restricting piece 84 includes a shaft 85 and a restricting plate 86 integrally formed so as to protrude from the shaft 85 in a direction orthogonal to the shaft 85. The rotation restricting piece 84 is disposed so that the axial direction of the shaft 85 is the same as the axial direction of the distribution rotating body 81, and the shaft 85 is received by a bearing (not shown). It is supported so as to be rotatable about 85 axial directions.

  The rotation restricting piece 84 is provided with a spring member 87 as urging means for urging the rotation restricting piece 84. Although the rotation restricting piece 84 is urged by the spring member 87 to the side that rotates counterclockwise as viewed in the state of FIG. 9, the restricting plate 86 is pressed against the rotation stopping member 88 from the original side in the urging direction. The contact prevents the rotation of the rotation restricting piece 84 from further rotating. The initial position of the rotation restricting piece 84 is a position where the restricting plate 86 contacts the rotation stopping member 88 from the original side in the urging direction.

  The ball distributing portion 83 of the distributing rotator 81 can be brought into contact with the restricting plate portion 86 of the rotation restricting piece 84 arranged at the initial position from the front side in the urging direction by the spring member 87. Are integrally formed with contact projections 89a to 89c. The contact projections 89a to 89c are provided at 120 ° intervals in the rotation direction of the distribution rotator 81. Incidentally, these contact projections 89a to 89c are provided at positions which do not obstruct the later-described distribution of game balls by the ball distribution unit 83.

  The regulating plate 86 of the rotation regulating piece 84 arranged at the initial position exists on the orbit of each of the contact protrusions 89a to 89c accompanying the rotation of the distribution rotating body 81. Therefore, when the distribution rotator 81 rotates in a predetermined direction, the contacting projections 89a to 89c located near the regulating plate portion 86 abut on the regulating plate portion 86 from the original side in the rotation direction. Touch

  Here, the urging force for urging the rotation restricting piece 84 to the initial position is such that when one game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, one contact projection 89a to 89c is controlled by the restricting plate unit. The contact projections 89a to 89c are pushed out in the rotation direction to allow the contact projections 89a to 89c to move to a position on the front side in the rotation direction with respect to the regulating plate 86. The contact protrusions 89a to 89c arranged at the next positions are set to a force that prevents further movement by contacting the regulating plate 86 returned to the initial position. That is, when one game ball collides with the ball allocating unit 83 from above in the state of FIG. 9, the rotator 81 rotates in a predetermined direction due to the rotational force generated by the collision, so that the contact protrusion 89a Pushes out the regulating plate 86. Thus, the rotation restricting piece 84 rotates from the initial position in the counter-biasing direction. Thereafter, the contacting projection 89a further moves in the predetermined direction with the rotation of the distribution rotating body 81 in the predetermined direction, so that the contacting projection 89a moves to a position where the contacting projection 89a does not contact the regulating plate 86. Then, the rotation restricting piece 84 returns to the initial position. Thereafter, the contact protrusion 89b located on the original side in the rotation direction in the predetermined direction with respect to the contact protrusion 89a that has first contacted the restricting plate portion 86 contacts the restricting plate portion 86. At this time, since the rotational force of the distribution rotator 81 due to the collision of one game ball is somewhat reduced, the distribution rotator 81 is brought into contact with the restricting plate portion 86 by the contact projection 89b. The rotation force of 81 is received by the rotation restricting piece 84. As a result, further rotation of the distribution rotator 81 is prevented. In addition, since the distribution rotator 81 is formed so that the center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, the rotation of the distribution rotator 81 can be further increased by the contact protrusion 89 b abutting against the regulating plate 86. Is stopped, the game machine stands by at the prevented rotation position until a new game ball collides with the ball distribution unit 83.

  With the above configuration, each time one game ball collides with the ball sorting unit 83 from above, the sorting rotator 81 rotates 120 ° and stands by at the position rotated by 120 °. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C, different spherical vibrations are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the ball distribution unit 83 at 120 ° intervals in the rotation direction of the distribution rotating body 81. Division regions 91 to 93 are formed. Then, at each of the stop positions at 120 ° of the distribution rotator 81, a portion where the different ball distribution regions 91 to 93 are formed protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. It becomes. The respective ball distribution areas 91 to 93 will be described below.

  FIG. 10A shows a state in which the portion in which the first ball distribution area 91 is formed in the ball distribution section 83 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. In the first ball distribution area 91, the flow direction of the game ball that has collided with the ball distribution section 83 from above is changed to the left, and the force of the collision of the game ball is rotated by the rotation of the distribution rotator 81. A leftward guiding portion 95 is integrally formed so as to change the force. The leftward guiding portion 95 protrudes outward from the peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83. Further, the leftward guiding portion 95 has an edge wall portion 95a extending around the axis along the right edge of the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83, and a distribution rotating body formed continuously from the edge wall portion 95a. An inclined wall portion 95b is located on the left edge side of the outer peripheral surface of the ball allocating portion 83 as the 81 moves toward the rotation destination when the game ball rotates by the force of the game ball. When a game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution unit 83 from above while the first ball distribution area 91 is at the front position, the game ball moves to the right by the edge wall portion 95a. It collides with the inclined wall portion 95b in a restricted state. By hitting the inclined wall portion 95b, the game ball receives a drag directed to the left, and changes the flowing direction toward the left of the ball sorting portion 83, and is further leftward than the ball sorting portion 83. It flows downward from the position. The rotator 81 is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise as viewed in the state of FIG. 9 by the collision force of the game ball received by the inclined wall portion 95b.

  FIG. 10B shows a state where the portion where the second ball distribution area 92 is formed in the ball distribution section 83 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. In the second ball distribution area 92, while maintaining the downward direction of the game ball that has collided with the ball distribution section 83 from above as it is, the force at the time of the collision of the game ball is applied to the distribution rotator 81. A central guide portion 96 is integrally formed so as to change the rotational force. The center guiding portion 96 protrudes outward from a peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83. The central guiding portion 96 includes a pair of edge wall portions 96 a and 96 b extending around the axis along each of the left edge and the right edge on the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83, and the second ball sorting region 92. An intermediate step portion 96c is formed to protrude slightly outward at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. When a game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution unit 83 from above in a state where the second ball distribution area 92 is at the front position, the game ball is formed by a pair of left and right edge wall portions 96a, 96b. The vehicle collides with the intermediate step portion 96c in a state where the movement to the left and right sides is restricted. Although the game ball receives the drag toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by colliding with the intermediate step portion 96c, the game ball is directed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the window panel 17a arranged opposite to the game board 24 in front of the pachinko machine 10. The movement is restricted and flows down vertically. In addition, the rotator 81 for distribution rotates 120 ° counterclockwise as viewed in the state of FIG. 9 due to the collision force of the game balls received by the intermediate step portion 96c.

  FIG. 10C shows a state where the portion where the third ball distribution area 93 is formed in the ball distribution section 83 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. In the third ball distribution area 93, the flow direction of the game ball that has collided with the ball distribution section 83 from above is changed to the right, and the force of the collision of the game ball is rotated by the rotation of the distribution rotator 81. A rightward guiding portion 97 is integrally formed so as to change the force. The right guiding portion 97 protrudes outward from the peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83. Further, the rightward guiding portion 97 is formed by an edge wall portion 97a extending around the axis along the left edge of the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83, and a rotating body for distribution formed continuously from the edge wall portion 97a. An inclined wall portion 97b is provided on the right edge side of the outer peripheral surface of the ball allocating portion 83 as the 81 moves toward the rotation destination when the game ball is rotated by the force of the game ball. When a game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution unit 83 from above in a situation where the third ball distribution area 93 is located at the front position, the game ball is moved to the left by the edge wall portion 97a. It collides with the inclined wall portion 97b in a restricted state. By colliding with the inclined wall portion 97b, the game ball receives a drag directed rightward, and changes the flowing direction toward the right of the ball sorting portion 83, so that it is more rightward than the ball sorting portion 83. It flows downward from the position. Further, the distribution rotator 81 rotates 120 ° counterclockwise as viewed in the state of FIG. 9 due to the collision force of the game balls received by the inclined wall portion 97b.

  With the above configuration, each time one game ball is supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game ball is changed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 → Vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 → to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 → to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 → to vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 → to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 → .. Are sequentially changed in the order of left of the first distribution mechanism 71. That is, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one out of three, and one out of three. , And is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one out of three.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the first distribution mechanism 71 having the above configuration is provided at the most upstream portion of the right area PA3. The position where the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided in the right area PA3 is formed such that the center frame 40b provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 40 projects rightward. This is a position where game balls flowing from the upper area PA1 to the right area PA3 always pass, and are positions where game balls pass one by one. Thus, the game balls flowing from the upper area PA1 to the right area PA3 are always supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71. And, as already described, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one to three. The distribution is performed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 at a rate of one, and is distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a rate of one out of three.

  In the right area PA3, a first guide rail 99a is provided for guiding a game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 to a lower left position of the first distribution mechanism 71. A second distribution mechanism 72 is provided at a position where a game ball is guided by the first guide rail 99a, and is distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the first guide rail 99a. Reaches the second distribution mechanism 72 without fail.

  The second distribution mechanism 72 has the same configuration as the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Therefore, each time one game ball is supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72 by the first guide rail 99a, the distribution direction of the game ball is set to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72. → vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 → right of the second distribution mechanism 72 → left of the second distribution mechanism 72 → vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 → right of the second distribution mechanism 72. → the left side of the second distribution mechanism 72 → sequentially. That is, the game balls supplied from above to the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72 by the first guide rail 99a are distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 at a ratio of one out of three balls. One third is distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72, and one third is distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72.

  In the right area PA3, a second guide rail 99b for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 to a lower left position of the second distribution mechanism 72 is provided. The through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the second guide rail 99b, and the game ball distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 and guided by the second guide rail 99b is surely provided. At the through winning section 36. As described above, the through winning portion 36 has a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs. Then, the game balls that have passed in the vertical direction through the through holes of the through winning portion 36 are not discharged from the game area PA, but continue flowing down the game area PA. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning section 36 flows vertically downward, the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning apparatus 37 existing to the right of the through winning section 36, the first special figure winning apparatus, It is not guided to the 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34.

  In the right area PA3, there is provided a third guide rail 99c for guiding game balls distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 to a position vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72. The branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 99c, and is distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 and guided by the third guide rail 99c. The game ball surely wins the branch winning device 37 if the branch winning device 37 is in the open state. As described above, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is immediately detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, and thereafter, the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second derivation that exist downstream of the first derivation area 65c. After being detected by any one of the second opportunity detection sensors 66c existing in the area 65d, the paper is discharged to the back side of the game board 24. When the game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the first special figure prize winning device 33 enters the receiving state, and when the game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the second special figure prize winning device is achieved. 34 is in the receiving state.

  On the other hand, when a game ball is guided by the third guide rail 99c in a state where the branch winning device 37 is in the closed state, the game ball continues flowing down the game area PA without winning the branch winning device 37. I do. In this case, since the game ball that has passed in front of the branch opening / closing member 62 of the branch winning device 37 flows vertically downward, the through-winning portion 36 existing on the side of the branch winning device 37 and the first It is not guided to the special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34.

  In the right area PA3, a fourth guide rail 99d for guiding the game balls distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72 to a position on the lower right of the second distribution mechanism 72 is provided. At the position where the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 99d, a first special figure prize winning device 33 and a second special figure prize winning device 34 are vertically arranged in parallel. Further, the fourth guide rail 99d is used for the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and the game balls distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71. The first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are formed so as to be guided to the juxtaposed positions.

  The first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction such that the first special figure prize winning device 33 faces upward. The passage portion 59a formed by the cover member 59 in the first special figure winning device 33 and the passage portion 59a formed by the cover member 59 in the second special figure winning device 34 exist on the same axis. It is on the same axis as the exit portion of the guide rail 99d. Further, the distance between the exit portion of the fourth guide rail 99d and the entrance portion of the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33 is less than one game ball, and the first special figure winning device 33 The distance between the exit portion of the passage portion 59a and the entrance portion of the passage portion 59a of the second special figure prize winning device 34 is also less than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball guided by the fourth guide rail 99d is reliably guided to the passage portion 59a of the first special figure prize winning device 33, and when the game ball does not win the first special figure prize winning device 33, The game ball is reliably guided to the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34.

  When a game ball is guided to the passage portion 59a of the first special figure prize device 33 by the fourth guide rail 99d when the first special figure prize device 33 is in the receiving state, the game ball is the first special figure prize. A prize is won in the prize device 33. Further, when the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in the non-accepting state and the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the accepting state, the game ball is inserted into the passage portion 59a of the first special figure prize winning device 33 by the fourth guide rail 99d. Is guided, the game ball passes through the passage portion 59a of the first special figure prize winning device 33, flows into the passage portion 59a of the second special figure prize winning device 34, and is transmitted to the second special figure prize winning device 34. You will win a prize.

  On the other hand, when a game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 99d in a state where both the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, the game ball is converted to the first special figure prize winning device. The game area PA after passing through both the passage portions 59a of the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 without winning any of the figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34. Continue flowing down. In this case, the game balls that have passed through the passage portions 59a of both the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 flow vertically downward. It is not guided to the through winning section 36 and the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning apparatus 37 existing on the right side of the 2 special figure winning apparatus 34.

  Next, how the game balls are guided by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. FIG. 11A shows a timing at which game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 11B shows a period during which game balls are distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71. FIG. 11C shows a period in which game balls are distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 11D shows game balls distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71. 11 (e) shows the timing at which game balls are supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72, and FIG. 11 (f) distributes game balls to the left by the second distribution mechanism 72. FIG. 11 (g) shows a period in which game balls are distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72, and FIG. 11 (h) shows a game directed to the right by the second distribution mechanism 72. Indicates the period during which the ball is sorted.

  At the timing of t1, a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. At the timing of t1, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a state of distributing the game balls to the left as shown in FIG. 11B. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, the game ball targeted for the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, so that the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and at the timing of t2, the timing shown in FIG. As shown in (b) and FIG. 11 (c), the first distribution mechanism 71 changes the state of distributing the game balls to the left to the state of distributing the game balls vertically downward. That is, when the distribution of the game balls occurs once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the direction of the next order.

  The game balls distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 are guided by first guiding rails 99a provided in the game area PA. Since the second distribution mechanism 72 is provided at the destination guided by the first guide rail 99a as described above, a game ball is placed on the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. Supplied. At the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 11 (f), the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is in a state of distributing the game balls to the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 are distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, when the game ball targeted for the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and at the timing of t3, the timing shown in FIG. As shown in (f) and FIG. 11 (g), the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state of distributing the game balls to the left to a state of distributing the game balls vertically downward. That is, when the distribution of the game balls occurs once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game balls by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the direction of the next order.

  The game balls distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 are guided by the second guide rail 99b provided in the game area PA. Since the through-prize portion 36 is provided at the destination guided by the second guide rail 99b as described above, the game ball surely wins the through-prize portion 36. The occurrence of a prize in the through prize unit 36 causes the general-purpose display unit 46 to start displaying a variable pattern.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 again as shown in FIG. At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 11C, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a state of distributing the game balls vertically downward. Accordingly, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed vertically downward from the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and at the timing of t5, FIG. As shown in FIG. 11C and FIG. 11D, the first distribution mechanism 71 changes the state of distributing the game balls vertically downward to the state of distributing the game balls rightward. That is, when the distribution of the game balls occurs once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the direction of the next order. The game balls supplied vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71 are guided to the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game area PA. At this timing, both the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state. Game balls do not win.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the game balls are again supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. At the timing of the t6, as shown in FIG. 11D, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state where the game balls are distributed rightward. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and at the timing of t7, FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 11D, the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state of distributing game balls to the right to a state of distributing game balls to the left. That is, when the distribution of the game balls occurs once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the direction of the next order. The game ball supplied to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided to the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game area PA. At this timing, both the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state. Game balls do not win.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 again as shown in FIG. At the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 11B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state where the game balls are distributed to the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, as in the case of the timing of t2, the first distributing mechanism 71 moves to the left at the timing of t9, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C. The state is changed from distributing the game ball toward the game ball to distributing the game ball vertically downward.

  The game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided by the first guide rail 99a, and is thus transmitted to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. Is supplied. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 11 (g), the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is in a state of distributing the game balls vertically downward. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 are distributed vertically downward from the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, the game ball targeted for the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, so that the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °. As shown in (g) and FIG. 11 (h), the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state of distributing game balls vertically downward to a state of distributing game balls rightward. That is, when the distribution of the game balls occurs once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game balls by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the direction of the next order.

  The game balls distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 are guided by the third guide rail 99c provided in the game area PA. The branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is provided at the destination guided by the third guide rail 99c as described above. Further, if the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3 of the game area PA in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) in any of the high probability states described later, the timing of t9 By this time, the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 has been completed, and the branch winning device 37 is surely in the open state. Accordingly, three game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the game balls that have won the through prize winning portion 36 are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, and the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are replaced by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution ball. At the timing of being guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch prize device 37 through the distribution mechanism 72, the branch prize device 37 is in an open state, and a prize to the branch prize device 37 occurs. The game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is immediately detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, and the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (specifically, 0. 0) after the winning of the branch winning device 37 occurs. Until a period shorter than (6 seconds) elapses, detection is performed by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c.

  Thereafter, the same situation as the timing of t4 to the timing of t7 occurs from the timing of t11 to the timing of t14. As a result, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed from the state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 11C and FIG. At the time t14, as shown in FIG. 11 (b) and FIG. 11 (d), from a state where game balls are distributed to the right to a state where game balls are distributed to the left. I do. In addition, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11 and the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t13 are both arranged areas of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34. Will be induced. In this case, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t9 are the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11. , The player has already won the branch prize device 37 and has been detected by one of the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. When the game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the first special figure prize winning device 33 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and when the game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the second special figure winning device 33 is activated. The drawing winning device 34 changes from the closed state to the open state. Then, when the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are in the open state, they are changed from the open state to the closed state on condition that two game balls have won. Therefore, at the timing of t11 and the timing of t13, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided through the fourth guiding rail 99d becomes the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34. Wins the open side. Since two game balls will be won in the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34, the condition for shifting to the closed state is satisfied, and the open state is changed to the closed state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t15, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 again as shown in FIG. At the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 11B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which the game balls are distributed to the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, similarly to the case of the timing of t2 and the timing of t9, the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 11B and FIG. Changes from a state in which game balls are distributed to the left to a state in which game balls are distributed vertically downward.

  The game balls distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 are guided by the first guide rail 99a, and are transmitted to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. Is supplied. At the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 11H, the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is in a state of distributing the game balls to the right. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 are distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, when the game ball targeted for the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, the ball distribution unit 83 is rotated by 120 °, and at the timing of t17, the ball distribution unit 83 is rotated. As shown in FIG. 11 (f) and FIG. 11 (h), the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state of distributing game balls to the right to a state of distributing game balls to the left. That is, when the distribution of the game balls occurs once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game balls by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the direction of the next order.

  The game balls distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72 are guided by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game area PA. As described above, the area where the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 are juxtaposed exists at the destination guided by the fourth guide rail 99d. In this case, at the timing of t16, when the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 is guided to the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34, the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second Since both the special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, neither the first special figure winning device 33 nor the second special figure winning device 34 receives a game ball.

  However, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11 is placed in the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33, 34 before the special figure prize winning devices 33, 34 to be opened are in an open state. When guided, the game ball does not win the special figure prize winning devices 33, 34. In this case, at the timing of t16, at the timing when the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 is guided to the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33, 34, any one of the special figure prize winning devices 33, 34 is still in place. Since the game ball is in the open state, the game ball wins the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 in the open state. Due to this, due to the movement of the game ball in the branch winning device 37, the detection timing of the game ball by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b or the second opportunity detection sensor 66c is delayed from the assumed timing, Even if the shift to the open state of the drawing winning devices 33 and 34 is delayed, before the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 returns to the distribution state toward the through winning section 36. In addition, it becomes possible to surely generate a winning of two game balls, which is the upper limit of winning, in the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 which are the opening targets.

  Thereafter, the same situation as the timing of t4 to the timing of t7 and the timing of t11 to t14 occurs from the timing of t18 to the timing of t21. As a result, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed from the state of distributing the game balls vertically downward to the right at the timing of t19 as shown in FIGS. 11C and 11D. At the time t21, and changes from the state of distributing the game balls to the right to the state of distributing the game balls to the left at the timing of t21, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11D. I do.

  In this case, all of these game balls are guided to the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34. At this guided timing, both the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state. No game ball wins in any of the 34.

  Here, the distribution state of the game balls is sequentially changed in the first distribution mechanism 71 each time a game ball is supplied, but the distribution state makes one round by supplying three game balls. Similarly, the distribution state of the game balls is sequentially changed by the second distribution mechanism 72 each time a game ball is supplied, but the distribution state makes one round by the supply of three game balls. Also, only the game balls distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71 are supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72. Then, in order for the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 to make one circuit, nine game balls need to be supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. In the state of FIG. 11, the timing of t21 is a timing at which nine game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 counted from the timing of t1, and the timing of the first distribution mechanism is the timing of t21. The distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed at the timing of t22 by the game ball supplied to the game ball 71, so that the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 becomes the distribution state at the timing of t1. At the timing of t22, the distribution state of the second distribution mechanism 72 also becomes the distribution state at the timing of t1. In other words, in any of the high-probability states to be described later, a prize cycle occurs in which the prize enters the through prize unit 36 → the prize in the branch prize device 37 → the first special figure prize device 33 or the second special figure prize device 34. In order to do so, it is necessary to supply nine game balls to the right area PA3.

  In this case, the number of prize balls of the game balls for winning one game ball to the first special figure prize device 33, the second special figure prize device 34, and the branch prize device 37 is all three. In addition, when the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are in the open state, the winning state of the two game balls occurs, and the closed state is established. Furthermore, when game balls are supplied to the right side area PA3 in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds), within the range of nine game balls for generating the above-mentioned winning cycle. After the game ball that will win the branch winning device 37, there will be two game balls that will win the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 in the open state. Thus, in the case of any of the high probability states described later, nine game balls for generating the above-described winning cycle cause the branch winning device 37 to generate one game ball and open. It is possible to generate a prize of two game balls in the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34, and in this case, nine game balls are paid out. Thus, the winning cycle can be continued without reducing the number of game balls possessed by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the second distribution mechanism 72 is guided in the guide path by the fourth guiding rail 99d for guiding the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 to the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34. The passage length dimension of the passage area below is set to be larger than the passage length dimension of the guide path by the third guide rail 99c for guiding the game balls distributed by the second distribution mechanism 72 to the branch entrance 61. ing. As a result, the game balls distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71 pass through the lateral position of the second distribution mechanism 72 and then reach the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34. Can be secured longer than the time required for the game balls distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72 to enter the branch entrance 61. As a result, it is possible to secure a long minimum period required for the game ball to reach the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 after the winning in the branch winning device 37 occurs.

  Even if a game ball enters the branch prize winning device 37, the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 are in a receiving state until the game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b or the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. There is no. In this case, since the shortest time required for the game ball to reach the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 from the occurrence of the prize to the branch prize winning device 37 is long, the branch winning prize device is secured. By the time the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 arrive at the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 in the following order of the game balls that will win the 37, any one of the special figure prizes will be won. It is possible to make the devices 33 and 34 complete the transition to the receiving state.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 101 for controlling a main game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 101 has a main control board housed in a board box. Note that the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably connected and a connection portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, or the adhesive layer remains on the object to be peeled off when peeled off, A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being done is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box may be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 101. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 102 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 103 and a control device collecting unit 104 are attached to the back pack 102.

  The payout mechanism 103 includes a tank 105 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 106 for paying out game balls stored in the tank 105. The game balls paid out from the payout device 106 are discharged to an upper plate or a lower plate through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 106. The payout mechanism 103 is supplied with a main power of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is mounted with a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing power ON and OFF operations.

  The control device aggregation unit 104 includes a payout control device 107 having a function of controlling the payout device 106, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like are generated and output, and are generated when the player operates the firing operation device 28. A power supply / launch control device 108 for controlling launching of a game ball. The payout control device 107 and the power supply / firing control device 108 are arranged one on the other so that the payout control device 107 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 101 includes a main control board 111 for controlling a main game, and a power failure monitoring board 115 for monitoring a power supply. An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A certain RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be configured as an individual chip. The same applies to the MPUs of the control devices other than the main control device 101.

  The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 112, a power failure monitoring board 115 provided in the main control device 101 is connected, and a payout control device 107 is connected. A power supply / emission control device 108 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 32a, 35c, 36a, 54, 66a, 66b, 66c (hereinafter also referred to as various winning detection sensors 32a to 66c) are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various prize detection sensors 32a to 66c include a general prize section 31, a first special figure normal prize section 32, a first special figure prize apparatus 33, a second special figure prize apparatus 34, a special electric prize apparatus 35, a through prize section 36, The MPU 112 includes a detection sensor provided in a winning-corresponding ball unit such as the branch winning device 37, and the MPU 112 determines a winning for each winning-corresponding ball unit. In the MPU 112, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the first special figure normal winning section 32, the first special figure winning apparatus 33, the second special figure winning apparatus 34 or the through winning section 36.

  The output side of the MPU 112 is connected to the payout control device 107, the power failure monitoring board 115, and the sound emission control device 121. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 107 based on a prize determination result for the prize-corresponding ball entry section. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 121. The details of these various commands will be described later.

  On the output side of the MPU 112, the first special figure prize driving unit 56a for operating the first special figure prize winning device 33 between the accepting state and the non-accepting state, and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are accepted. And a non-accepting state, a second special figure prize driving unit 56b, a special power driving unit 35b for opening and closing the open / close door 35a of the special power prize device 35, and a branch of the branch prize device 37. A drive unit 63 for opening and closing the side opening / closing member 62, a switching drive unit 68 for operating the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37, a special figure unit 45, and a general-purpose display unit 46 are connected. ing. The special figure unit 45 includes a first special figure display section 45a, a second special figure display section 45b, a first special figure reservation display section 45c, and a second special figure reservation display section 45d. Are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, when the opening condition of the branch winning device 37 is satisfied, the drive control of the branch entrance driving unit 63 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is opened, and the switching piece is switched. The drive control of the switching drive unit 68 is performed in the MPU 112 so that the 67 performs a predetermined operation described later. Further, when a game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37, the driving unit for the first special figure prize in the MPU 112 so that the first special figure prize device 33 is in the receiving state. The drive control of 56a is executed. When a game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37, the driving unit for the second special figure prize in the MPU 112 so that the second special figure prize device 34 is in the receiving state. The drive control of 56b is executed. In the open / close execution mode, the MPU 112 controls the drive of the drive unit 35b for special power so that the special power winning device 35 is opened and closed. Further, at the time of the game, display control of the special figure unit 45 is executed in the MPU 112. In addition, when a prize occurs in the through prize section 36, the MPU 112 executes the display control of the general-purpose display section 46.

  The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply / emission control device 108, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 108. The payout control device 107 controls the payout of the prize ball and the loaned ball by the payout device 106 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 101.

  The power supply / emission control device 108 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates necessary operating power for the main control board 111, the payout control device 107, and the like, and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply / emission control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit at the time of power interruption such as a backup capacitor. Power for storage retention is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 101. The power supply / launch control device 108 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 27, and the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 121 includes a sound emission control board 122 on which the MPU 123 is mounted. The MPU 123 includes a ROM 124 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 123 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 124. A certain RAM 125, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

  The MPU 123 determines the contents of the effect to be executed in the game round, the opening / closing execution mode, and the like, based on the command received from the main control device 101. Then, while controlling the light emission of the display light emitting portion 18a provided on the front door frame 14, the sound output control of the speaker portion 18b provided on the front door frame 14 is performed so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. I do.

  The MPU 123 is electrically connected to the display control device 126. The MPU 123 transmits to the display control device 126 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 101 and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 101. The display control device 126 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the MPU 123 of the sound emission control device 121.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in MPU 112 of main controller 101>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 112 uses the various counter information during the game, and determines the winning occurrence lottery, the setting of the display of the first special figure display unit 45a, the setting of the display of the second special figure display unit 45b, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the general The setting of the display of the figure display unit 46 is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a winning random number counter C1 used for a lottery of a winning occurrence and a big hit used for determining a big hit type are determined. A type counter C2; a reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 comes off and fluctuates; a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the hit random number counter C1; 45a and 45b and a variation type counter CS for determining the display continuation time in the symbol display device 41. Further, a general random number counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the branch winning device 37 is to be opened in a low probability state described later is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in a lottery counter area 131 of the RAM 114.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. The respective numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 indicate that a prize has occurred in the first special figure normal prize section 32, the first special figure prize apparatus 33, or the second special figure prize apparatus 34. In this case, it is stored in the special figure reservation area 132. The special figure reservation area 132 includes a first special figure reservation area 133, a second special figure reservation area 134, and a special figure execution area 135.

  The first special figure reservation area 133 includes a first area 133a, a second area 133b, a third area 133c, and a fourth area 133d. The first special figure normal prize section 32 or the first special figure prize apparatus 33 is provided. Numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in any of the areas 133a to 133d as special figure side hold information in accordance with the winning history.

  In this case, the first area 133a to the fourth area 133d include the first area 133a in the case where a prize to the first special figure normal prize section 32 or the first special figure prize prize device 33 occurs continuously plural times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the second area 133b → the third area 133c → the fourth area 133d. By providing the four areas 133a to 133d in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls in the first special figure normal prize section 32 or the first special figure prize apparatus 33 are held and stored. It has become.

  Note that the number that can be held in the first special figure holding area 133 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another number such as two, three, five or more. , May be singular.

  The second special map reservation area 134 includes a first area 134a, a second area 134b, a third area 134c, and a fourth area 134d, and a winning random number counter is set in accordance with the winning history of the second special figure prize winning device 34. Numerical information of C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in any one of the areas 134a to 134d as hold information on the special figure side.

  In this case, the first area 134a, the second area 134b, and the third area 134c are displayed in the first area 134a to the fourth area 134d when the prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 occurs plural times consecutively. → Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth area 134d. By providing the four areas 134a to 134d in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls in the second special figure prize winning device 34 are stored on hold.

  It should be noted that the number of items that can be held in the second special figure holding area 134 is not limited to four, but may be any number, and may be two, three, five or more. , May be singular.

  The execution area 135 for the special figure stores the hold information of the target for performing the determination as to whether the special figure is correct or not when the variable display is started in any of the special figure display sections 45a and 45b. Area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display section 45a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 133a of the first special figure hold area 133 moves to the special figure execution area 135. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display section 45b is started, the hold information stored in the first area 134a of the second special figure hold area 134 is moved to the special figure execution area 135.

  The information corresponding to the general-purpose random number counter C4 is stored in a general-purpose execution area 136 provided in the RAM 114 when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs. The general-purpose execution area 136 includes a general-purpose random number counter C4, which is referred to in a lottery process to determine whether or not to open the branch prize device 37 in response to a prize in the through prize unit 36 in a low probability state described later. This area stores numerical information. In the execution area 136 for the ordinary figure, when a prize occurs in the through prize portion 36 during a prize effective period in which the prize in the through prize portion 36 is valid in a low probability state described later, the general telephone random number counter C4 Is stored.

  Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

  First, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the first special figure storing area 133 of the special figure storing area 132 at the timing when the game ball wins the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. Then, the game ball is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 of the special figure holding area 132 at the timing when the game ball has won the second special figure winning device 34. Then, using the stored value of the hit random number counter C1, a success / failure determination process is performed.

  The value of the random number to be won in the win / fail determination process is stored in the ROM 113 as a win / fail table. In the success / failure table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the success / failure results. The jackpot result is a result of a shift to an opening / closing execution mode in which the special power winning device 35 is controlled to be opened / closed, and a result of a shift to a win / loss lottery mode and a support mode. The departure result is a pass / fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening / closing execution mode and does not trigger a transition in the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  As the success / failure table, there is a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode. That is, the pachinko machine 10 acquires the suspension information acquired based on the prize in the first special figure prize unit 32 or the first special figure prize apparatus 33 and the acquired information based on the prize in the second special figure prize apparatus 34. The same winning / refusal table is referred to by the held information, and in any case, a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode exist as the lottery modes in the winning / rejecting lottery.

  Explaining each of the success / failure tables in detail, the success / failure table for the low probability mode has two random number values (for example, “5” and “305”) as the jackpot result. The others are the values of random numbers that result in departures. In the hit / fail table for the high-probability mode, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result is set larger than that in the hit / fail table for the low-probability mode, and specifically, 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305”, “334”, “365”, “392”, “420” , "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  In addition, if the probability of the jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary. The value group of the hit random number counter C1 may be configured such that only a part is included in the value group of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the high probability mode, or may not be included. .

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the first special figure holding area 133 of the special figure holding area 132 at the timing when the game ball wins the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. Then, the game ball is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 of the special figure reservation area 132 at the timing when the game ball has won the second special figure prize winning device 34. Then, the distribution determination process is performed using the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. Each of the jackpot results is (1) the content of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the content of the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) the content of the opening / closing lottery mode. At least one of the three contents, that is, the contents of the support mode after the execution mode ends, is different.

  The opening / closing execution mode is a game state in which opening and closing control of the special power prize device 35 is executed so that a prize to the special power prize device 35 can be achieved. In the open / close execution mode, a round game is executed a predetermined number of times. The round game means that the special power winning device 35 is opened a predetermined number of times to open the special power winning device 35 with the predetermined special power releasing period as an upper limit, and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are played by the special power winning device. This is a game that continues until one of the conditions for winning a prize is satisfied. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games in the open / close execution mode is set to 16 times, and in each round game, the special power prize device 35 having the special power release period of 29 sec and the upper limit number of 10 is one open. Executed only once. In this case, as described above, in a situation where the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds. Therefore, the special power release period in each round game is longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, if the game balls aiming for a prize to the special prize winning device 35 are normally fired, the number of game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number will win the special prize winning device 35 in each round game. Then, every time a prize is generated in the special prize winning device 35, payout of the number of game balls corresponding to the special prize winning device 35 is executed. Therefore, when the shift to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the benefit of increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is given to the player.

  The support mode is a type of a game state that determines the frequency at which the opening and closing control of the branch prize device 37 is executed and the execution mode of the opening and closing control when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs. As the support mode, a low frequency support mode, a first high frequency support mode, and a second high frequency support mode are set. In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the frequency with which the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed in response to the occurrence of a prize in the through winning unit 36 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode, when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, the numerical information of the ordinary random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired numerical information is the numerical information corresponding to the open winning. In this case, the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. The probability of the open winning is arbitrary, but is set to 1/20, for example. In the low frequency support mode, the branch winning device 37 shifts to the open state only once, and the opening duration of the branch winning device 37 in the opening time is a short period equal to or shorter than the launch cycle of the game ball. Set to 1 second. Therefore, even in the low frequency support mode, even if a prize is generated in the through prize unit 36 and an open prize is won, the prize in the branch prize device 37 is unlikely to be generated. Further, as described above, even if a prize is generated in the through prize section 36 and an open prize is won, the opening and closing control of the branch prize apparatus 37 is not immediately started, but the prize in the through prize section 36 is triggered. When the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46 started as described above is completed, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern is constant at 0.7 seconds.

  In the first high-frequency support mode, when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, the open lottery process is not executed, and the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is reliably executed. In the first high-frequency support mode, the branch winning device 37 shifts to the open state only once, and the opening duration of the branch winning device 37 in the opening time is the firing cycle of the game ball × n (n is It is set to 0.8 seconds, which is a long time equal to or longer than 1 (an integer of 1 or more). Therefore, when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs in the first high frequency support mode, there is a high probability that a winning in the branch winning device 37 occurs. The open state of the branch winning device 37 ends when one game ball wins in the branch winning device 37 even if the opening duration has not elapsed.

  As described above, the switching prize device 37 is provided with the switching piece 67, and when the switching piece 67 is disposed at the retracted position, the game ball that has won the branch prize device 37 is sent to the first opportunity detection sensor 66b. When the switching piece 67 is located at the guidance position, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. In this configuration, when the switching piece 67 is in a state where the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, the switching waiting period (specifically, 0.9 seconds) from the first opening start timing of the branch winning device 37. Is held at the evacuation position until elapses, and after the switching standby period elapses, the evacuation position is switched to the guidance position and held at the guidance position. In the case of such a configuration, in the first high frequency support mode, the open state of the branch winning device 37 is started while the switching piece 67 is held at the retracted position, and the opening continuous period of the branch winning device 37 elapses. The switching piece 67 is held at the retracted position until a timing later than the timing. Furthermore, in the first high frequency support mode, even if a prize is generated in the branch prize winning device 37 at the timing when the opening continuation period of the branch prize winning device 37 elapses, the switching ball 67 holds the game ball at the retreat position. The game ball passes through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 within the range of the period. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is reliably detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, and the game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b. The first special figure prize winning device 33 is opened.

  Further, even if a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not immediately started, but the general-purpose display unit 46 started when the winning in the through winning unit 36 is triggered. When the change display of the picture is completed, the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, in the first high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display period of the pattern is constant at 1.5 seconds, which is a time longer than twice the firing cycle of game balls. Although the details will be described later, the state in which the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3 in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) by setting the variable display period to 1.5 seconds. In the above, three or more game balls in the order of the game balls winning in the through winning part 36 are branched by the first distribution mechanism 71, the second distribution mechanism 72, and the third guide rail 99c to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. The branch winning device 37 is in the open state at the timing of being guided to.

  In the second high frequency support mode, when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, the open lottery process is not executed, and the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is reliably executed. In the second high-frequency support mode, the branch prize winning device 37 shifts to the open state twice, and in the first opening time, the opening continuation period of the branch prize winning device 37 is the short period (0.1 seconds) described above. ), And the opening duration of the branch winning device 37 is set to the above-mentioned long period (0.8 seconds) in the second opening round. Therefore, the probability of winning in the branch winning device 37 is low in the first opening time, and the probability of winning in the branch winning device 37 is high in the second opening time. The open state of the branch winning device 37 ends when one game ball wins in the branch winning device 37 even if the opening duration has not elapsed. In this case, if a winning in the branch prize device 37 occurs in the first opening time, the second opening time is not executed. Between the first opening time and the second opening time, a closing continuation period in which the branch prize winning device 37 is maintained in the closed state is set, and the closing continuation period is set to 0.8 which is the same as the above long period. Set to seconds.

  As described above, when the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is in a state where the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, the switching waiting period (specifically, from the initial opening timing of the branch winning device 37). Until 0.9 second) elapses, the evacuation position is held at the evacuation position, and after the elapse of the switching standby period, the evacuation position is switched to the guidance position and held at that guidance position. In the case of such a configuration, in the second high-frequency support mode, the switching piece 67 is switched to the guidance position and the second opening state of the branch winning device 37 is started during the period in which the switching piece 67 is held at the guidance position, The switching piece 67 is held at the guide position until the timing after the opening continuation period of the second open state elapses. Furthermore, in the second high frequency support mode, even if a prize to the branch prize device 37 occurs at the timing when the opening duration of the second open state elapses, the switching ball 67 is moved to the guiding position. The ball passes the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 within the range of the held period. Therefore, in the second high-frequency support mode, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is reliably detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, and the game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. Then, the second special figure prize winning device 34 is opened.

  Further, even if a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not immediately started, but the general-purpose display unit 46 started when the winning in the through winning unit 36 is triggered. When the change display of the picture is completed, the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, in the second high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display period of the pattern is constant at 0.7 seconds, which is a shorter time than in the first high-frequency support mode. As will be described in detail later, the variable display period is set to 0.7 seconds, and the opening duration of the first opening in the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 in the second high frequency support mode is set to 0.1. Seconds and the closing duration from the end of the first opening cycle to the start of the second opening cycle is set to 0.8 seconds, so that the shortest firing cycle (specifically, In the state where the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3 at 0.6 seconds), the game ball in the third order after the game ball winning in the through winning unit 36 is the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second vibration ball. At the timing of being guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 by the minute mechanism 72 and the third guide rail 99c, the branch winning device 37 is opened by the second opening.

  The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 113 as a distribution table. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), in the distribution table, as the types of jackpot results, a low-precision correspondence result, an 8R first high-precision correspondence result, and an 8R second high-precision correspondence result. A correspondence result and a second high-precision correspondence result of 16R are set. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each jackpot result.

  In the low-accuracy correspondence result, the opening / closing execution mode in which eight round games occur is set. In addition, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the low probability mode is set regardless of the winning / rejection lottery mode before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the low probability mode is the next jackpot result, and continues until the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the low-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. This low-frequency support mode results in a big hit, and continues until the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Note that the gaming state in which the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is the low probability state. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the support mode before and after the shift to the open / close execution mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  In the first high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, the opening / closing execution mode in which eight round games occur is set. In addition, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the mode is the high probability mode regardless of the win / fail lottery mode before the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. The high-probability mode is the next jackpot, and continues until the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the first high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. This first high-frequency support mode results in the next big hit, and continues until the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Note that the gaming state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode is the first high probability state.

  In the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, the opening / closing execution mode in which eight round games occur is set. In addition, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the mode is the high probability mode regardless of the win / fail lottery mode before the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. The high-probability mode is the next jackpot, and continues until the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode. After the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the second high frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the opening and closing execution mode. The second high-frequency support mode is the next jackpot result, and continues until the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Note that the gaming state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the second high frequency support mode is the second high probability state.

  In the second high-precision correspondence result of 16R, the opening / closing execution mode in which 16 round games occur is set. In addition, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the mode is the high probability mode regardless of the win / fail lottery mode before the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. The high-probability mode is the next jackpot, and continues until the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode. After the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the second high frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the opening and closing execution mode. The second high-frequency support mode is the next jackpot result, and continues until the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), the distribution table includes the distribution of the hold information acquired based on the winning in the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning apparatus 33. A distribution table for the first special figure used in the minute determination processing, and a second special figure distribution table used in the distribution determination processing of the hold information acquired based on the winning in the second special figure prize winning device 34. And a distribution table.

  The distribution table for the first special map will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 14A, the distribution table for the first special map includes a low-precision correspondence result and an 8R , A second highly accurate result of 8R, and a second highly accurate result of 16R. In the distribution table for the first special map, “0 to 19” corresponds to the low-precision correspondence result, “20 to 59” corresponds to the first high-precision correspondence result of 8R, and “60 to 60”. "-89" correspond to the second highly accurate correspondence result of 8R, and "90-99" correspond to the second highly accurate correspondence result of 16R. In the case of the distribution table for the first special map, when the jackpot is won, the probability of a low-probability correspondence result is 20%, and the probability of the first high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R is 40%. , 8R has a 30% probability of being the second highly accurate result, and 16R has a 10% probability of being the second highly accurate result.

  When the low-accuracy correspondence result, the first high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, or the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R results in the low-accuracy response result based on the winning in the first special map normal winning section 32 or the first special figure prize winning device 33, the opening / closing is executed. In the mode, a round game is performed with eight times as an upper limit number, and in each round game, the special power winning device 35 is opened and closed once. In other words, when one of the low-accuracy correspondence result, the first high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, and the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 35 in the open / close execution mode is visually the same. In addition, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although different stop results are displayed on the first special figure display unit 45a, the display area is set to be larger than that of the first special figure display unit 45a. In the displayed symbol display device 41, the stop result is displayed in a manner in which identification is impossible. More specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays the same combination of even symbols on any one of the activated lines. Further, in the open / close execution mode triggered by one of the low-precision response result, the first high-precision response result of 8R, and the second high-precision response result of 8R, any jackpot result is triggered until the ending period starts. The effect is executed in a mode in which it cannot be distinguished whether the current mode is the open / close execution mode. Thereby, when the opening / closing execution mode in which eight round games are executed occurs, the player expects that the state has shifted to the first high probability state or the second high probability state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Playing the game while expecting a transition to the second high-probability state which is advantageous to the player among the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state. Become. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the distribution table for the second special map, as shown in FIG. 14B, as the types of jackpot results to be distributed, a low-probability response result and a 16R second high-probability response result are set. ing. In the distribution table for the second special map, “0 to 19” corresponds to the low-precision correspondence result, and “20 to 99” corresponds to the second high-precision correspondence result of 16R. In the case of the second special map distribution table, when a jackpot is won, the probability of a low-accuracy correspondence result is 20%, and the probability of a 16R second highly-accurate correspondence result is 80%. .

  The distribution table for the first special map and the distribution table for the second special map have the same probability that the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode in the case of the jackpot winning. On the other hand, the probability of occurrence of the open / close execution mode in which 16 round games occur is higher in the distribution table for the second special map than in the distribution table for the first special map. Furthermore, the probability of the second high-accuracy correspondence result, which is a trigger for shifting to the second high probability state, is higher in the distribution table for the second special map than in the distribution table for the first special map. Therefore, the type of the jackpot result that can be selected in the case of the jackpot winning is more than the case where the internal lottery is performed after a prize is generated in the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure prize winning device 33. In the case where a prize is generated in the second special figure prize winning device 34 and the internal lottery is performed, it is more advantageous for the player.

  The winning modes of the game balls in the first high probability state and the second high probability state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 16 (a1) to FIG. 16 (f1), a winning mode of a game ball in the first high probability state will be described. FIG. 16 (a1) shows the timing at which a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the right area PA3, FIG. 16 (b1) shows the timing of winning the through winning section 36, and FIG. 16 (d1) shows a period during which the branch winning device 37 is in the open state, and FIG. 16 (e1) shows a timing of winning the branch winning device 37. FIG. 16 (f 1) shows a period in which the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is located at the guidance position.

  By continuously operating the firing operation device 28 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game balls can be operated in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). It is supplied to the game area PA. In this case, when the operation amount of the firing operation device 28 by the player is the maximum operation amount, the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right area PA3 has already been described. All are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16 (a1), at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t6, and the timing of t8, a gaming ball is provided to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle. Supplied.

  At the timing of t1, the respective distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the through winning unit 36, and therefore, the first distribution at the timing of t1. The game ball supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the through winning unit 36 at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 16 (b1). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16 (c1), the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display section 46 is started at the timing of t2. The variable display period of the variable display of the picture is 1.5 seconds.

  After that, at each of the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, which is a situation in which the variation display of the pattern is continued on the ordinary figure display unit 46, as shown in FIG. Supplied. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which game balls are guided to the juxtaposition regions of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34, the distribution state is set at the timings t3 and t4. The game balls supplied to the one distribution mechanism 71 are guided to the juxtaposition areas of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34. However, since neither the first special figure prize winning device 33 nor the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game ball does not win any of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. In the first high probability state, since the support mode is the first high frequency support mode, the branch prize winning device 37 as shown in (d1) of FIG. Becomes open. This open state is continued for a maximum of 0.8 seconds. In addition, when the first opening of the branch winning device 37 is started at the timing of t5, the switching piece 67 is disposed at the retracted position as shown in FIG. 16 (f1).

  Thereafter, at the timing t6 when the branch winning device 37 is in the open state, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a1). In this case, since the distribution state of each of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state in which a game ball is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch prize device 37, the distribution state is changed at the timing of t6. The game ball supplied to the one distribution mechanism 71 wins the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 16 (e1).

  The game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t7 finishes passing the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 in a period shorter than the shortest firing cycle. In this case, if no prize has occurred in the branch prize winning device 37, the open state of the branch prize winning device 37 is continued until the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 16 (d1). Further, even if a game ball wins in the branch winning device 37 at a timing t9 when the branch winning device 37 shifts to the closed state, the switching piece 67 is held at the retracted position until the subsequent timing of t10. The period from the timing t9 to the timing t10 is longer than the longest time required for the game ball that has won the branch prize device 37 to pass through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67. Therefore, the game ball which has won the branch prize winning device 37 in the first high probability state finishes passing the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 in a situation where the switching piece 67 is located at the retracted position, and thus the first ball is placed. This is detected by the trigger detection sensor 66b. When a game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the first special figure prize winning device 33 enters an accepting state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a1). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which game balls are guided to the juxtaposition regions of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing of t8. The game ball supplied to 71 is guided to the juxtaposition area of each special figure prize winning device 33,34. In this case, at this guidance timing, the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in the receiving state, so that the first special figure prize winning device 33 wins.

  Depending on the manner in which the game balls that have won the branch prize winning device 37 at the timing of t7 flow down in the branch prize winning device 37, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t8 may be the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34. There is a possibility that the first special figure prize winning device 33 is not yet in the receiving state at the timing of being guided to the juxtaposed area. Even in this case, the supply of the game balls supplied to the right area PA3 to the through-winning portion 36 occurs in nine cycles, so that each of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is distributed. Four game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 even after the timing of t8 until the state becomes the distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the through winning unit 36. Then, these four game balls are all guided to the juxtaposition area of each special figure prize winning device 33, 34. Therefore, by the time the game ball is guided to the through winning unit 36, two or more game balls are guided to the first special figure winning device 33 in the receiving state. Therefore, by the time the gaming balls are guided to the through winning unit 36, the first special figure winning device 33 receives the game balls of the upper limit winning number, and the first special figure winning device 33 receives the game balls. The state shifts from the state to the non-acceptance state. The condition is that the pattern change display is not performed on the general figure display unit 46, the branch winning device 37 is not in the open state, and the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepting state. This is a configuration in which winning in the through winning section 36 is activated. In this case, by completing the winning of the upper limit winning number of the game balls to the first special figure winning device 33 within the range of the nine game balls supplied to the right area PA3 as described above, the through winning portion. In a state where the game ball is guided to 36, it is possible to set a state in which winning in the through winning section 36 is activated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 (a2) to 16 (f2), a winning mode of the game ball in the second high probability state will be described. FIG. 16 (a2) shows the timing at which game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the right side area PA3, FIG. 16 (b2) shows the timing of winning to the through winning section 36, and FIG. 16 (d2) shows a period during which the branch winning device 37 is in an open state, and FIG. 16 (e2) shows a timing of winning the branch winning device 37. FIG. 16 (f2) shows a period in which the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is located at the guidance position.

  By continuously operating the firing operation device 28 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game balls can be operated in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). It is supplied to the game area PA. In this case, when the operation amount of the firing operation device 28 by the player is the maximum operation amount, the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right area PA3 has already been described. All are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16 (a2), at each of the timing of t11, the timing of t13, the timing of t16, the timing of t17, and the timing of t20, the game is transmitted to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle. A sphere is supplied.

  At the timing of t11, since the respective distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in the distribution state of guiding the game ball to the through winning unit 36, the first distribution at the timing of t11. The game ball supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the through winning unit 36 at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 16 (b2). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16 (c2), the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display section 46 is started at the timing of t12. The variable display period of the variable display of the picture is 0.7 seconds.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t13, when the variation display of the pattern is continued on the ordinary figure display unit 46, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a2). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposition regions of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing of t13. The game ball supplied to 71 is guided to the juxtaposition area of each special figure prize winning device 33,34. However, since neither the first special figure prize winning device 33 nor the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game ball does not win any of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t14, the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display section 46 is ended as shown in FIG. 16 (c2). In the second high probability state, since the support mode is the second high frequency support mode, at the timing of t14 when the display of the change of the pattern on the ordinary figure display unit 46 is completed, as shown in FIG. Becomes the first open state. Since the open duration in this open state is 0.1 second, it is unlikely that a win in the branch winning device 37 will occur. Further, during the opening continuation period of 0.1 second, the game ball is guided toward the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 in relation to the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72. It will not be done. Therefore, the first open state of the branch prize winning device 37 started at the timing of t14 ends at the timing of t15 without any prize to the branch prize winning device 37, and the branch prize winning device 37 is closed.

  In addition, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is disposed at the retreat position at the timing when the first opening state of the branch winning device 37 starts when the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16 (f2), the switching piece 67 is arranged at the retracted position at the timing of t14.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16, which is the state of the closed continuation period in which the closed state of the branch winning device 37 is maintained, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a2). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposition regions of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing of t13. The game ball supplied to 71 is guided to the juxtaposition area of each special figure prize winning device 33,34. However, since neither the first special figure prize winning device 33 nor the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the game ball does not win any of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t17, game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a2). In this case, since the distribution state of each of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state in which a game ball is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch prize winning device 37, the distribution state is changed at the timing of t17. The game balls supplied to the one distribution mechanism 71 are guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. In this configuration, the closing continuation period elapses at a timing t18, which is a timing before the timing at which the gaming ball is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, and the game ball branches as shown in FIG. 16 (d2). The winning device 37 is opened for the second time. Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (f2), the arrangement state of the switching piece 67 is switched from the retracted position to the guidance position at the timing of t18.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (e2), at the timing of t19, when the branch winning device 37 is in the second open state and the switching piece 67 is located at the guidance position, as shown in FIG. , The game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 wins the branch winning device 37. Since the game ball has passed through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 in a situation where the switching piece 67 is located at the guidance position, the game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. When a game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters a receiving state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t20, game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a2). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which game balls are guided to the juxtaposition areas of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing of t20. The game ball supplied to 71 is guided to the juxtaposition area of each special figure prize winning device 33,34. In this case, since the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state at this guidance timing, a prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 occurs.

  Depending on the manner in which the game balls that have won the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t19 flow down in the branch winning device 37, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t20 may be the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. There is a possibility that the second special figure prize winning device 34 is not yet in the receiving state at the timing when the second special figure prize winning device 34 is guided to the juxtaposed area. Even in this case, the supply of the game balls supplied to the right area PA3 to the through-winning portion 36 occurs in nine cycles, so that each of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is distributed. Four game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 even after the timing of t20 until the state becomes the distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the through winning unit 36. Then, these four game balls are all guided to the juxtaposition area of each special figure prize winning device 33, 34. Therefore, by the time the game ball is guided to the through winning unit 36, two or more game balls are guided to the second special figure winning device 34 in the receiving state. Therefore, by the time the gaming balls are guided to the through winning unit 36, the second special figure winning device 34 receives the game balls of the upper limit winning number, and the second special figure winning device 34 receives the game balls. The state shifts from the state to the non-acceptance state. The condition is that the pattern change display is not performed on the general figure display unit 46, the branch winning device 37 is not in the open state, and the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepting state. This is a configuration in which winning in the through winning section 36 is activated. In this case, as described above, the winning of the upper limit winning number of game balls to the second special figure winning device 34 within the range of the nine game balls supplied to the right area PA3 is completed, whereby the through winning section is achieved. In a state where the game ball is guided to 36, it is possible to set a state in which winning in the through winning section 36 is activated.

  As described above, in the first high probability state, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is reliably detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, so that the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state, In the probability state, the game ball that has won the branch prize winning device 37 is reliably detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, so that the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters the receiving state. Then, as described above, the lottery process is performed by the MPU 112 triggered by the prize in the second special figure prize winning device 34, rather than the case where the lottery process is executed by the MPU 112 in response to the prize in the first special figure prize winning device 33. When executed, the distribution mode of the jackpot result is more advantageous for the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the second high probability state a more advantageous gaming state than the first high probability state.

  By the respective operations of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the game balls supplied to the right area PA3 three times after the game balls that have won the through-prize portion 36 enter the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. Be guided. This makes it possible to fix the number of game balls required from the occurrence of a prize in the through prize unit 36 to the occurrence of a prize in the branch prize device 37 to three.

  In this case, in the first high probability state, the variable display period of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 is fixed to 1.5 seconds, which is the variable display period for the first high probability state. In addition, when the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 is completed, the branch winning device 37 is opened, and the open state is set to the opening continuous period so that the winning in the branch winning device 37 can be performed. It is set to 0.8 seconds. Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is disposed at the retreat position at the timing when the initial opening state of the branch winning device 37 is started, and the state of being disposed at the retreat position is maintained until the switching standby period elapses. You. Thereby, at the timing when the game ball supplied to the right area PA3 is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 three times after the game ball winning the through winning portion 36, the branch winning device 37 is opened. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize in the branch prize winning device 37, and it becomes possible to detect the game ball by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b.

  In the second high probability state, the variable display period of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 is fixed to 0.7 seconds which is the variable display period for the second high probability state. In addition, when the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display section 46 is completed, the branch winning device 37 is opened as the first opening time, and the open state makes it impossible to win the branch winning device 37. Is set to 0.1 second. Thereafter, the branch prize winning device 37 is maintained in the closed state for 0.8 seconds, which is the closing continuation period, and when the closing continuation period elapses, the branch winning prize device 37 is opened as the second opening time. In this open state, the open continuation period is set to 0.8 seconds so as to enable a prize to the branch prize device 37. Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is disposed at the retreat position at the timing when the initial opening state of the branch winning device 37 is started, and the state of being disposed at the retreat position is maintained until the switching standby period elapses. You. Since the switching waiting period elapses at the timing when the closing continuation period of the branch winning device 37 elapses, the switching piece 67 is moved from the retracted position to the guiding position at the timing when the branch winning device 37 is opened by the second opening. Can be switched. Thereby, at the timing when the game ball supplied to the right area PA3 is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 three times after the game ball winning the through winning portion 36, the branch winning device 37 is opened. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize to the branch prize winning device 37, and it becomes possible to detect the game ball by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c.

  On the other hand, in the low-probability state, the change display period of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 is fixed to 0.7 seconds. In addition, when the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 is completed, the branch winning device 37 is opened, and the open duration of the open state is set to 0.1 second. In this configuration, even if a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle, the game supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after three of the game balls that have won the through winning section 36. At the timing when the ball is guided to the branch entrance 61, the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 has already been completed, and the branch winning device 37 is in the closed state. Therefore, even if the branch winning device 37 can be in the open state in the low probability state, it is substantially impossible to generate a winning in the branch winning device 37.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment corresponding result in a game round in which a predetermined jackpot result is obtained, the symbol display device 41 is provided. In the stage prior to the derivation and display of the stop result after the start of the variable display of the symbol in, a display state for causing the player to think that the variable display state is likely to be the above-mentioned provision result. It should be noted that, specifically, the combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the activated lines is stopped and displayed.

  Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display, and a preview display for expecting the occurrence of a reach display and the occurrence of an assignment correspondence result at a stage before the reach display occurs. In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the symbol columns among the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the symbols are displayed in the remaining symbol columns in that state. And a display state in which the variable display is performed. In addition, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire symbol display device 41.

  In the notice display, the symbol display is started to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and then the symbols are variably displayed on all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or a part of the symbol columns is a plurality of symbols. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the columns, a mode for displaying a character separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background screen may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, or the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the display when the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. In addition, in the game time corresponding to the result of departure, when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 113 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Is executed. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not by the MPU 112 but by the MPU 123 of the audio light emission control device 121. In this case, in the MPU 123, the notice time is easily generated in the game time corresponding to any of the jackpot results, and the notice display with a low appearance rate is easily generated as compared to the game time corresponding to the out-of-game result. The lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 112 to determine the display continuation period in the first special figure display section 45a or the second special figure display section 45b and the symbol display continuation period in the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is determined at the time of starting the variation display on the first special figure display unit 45a or the second special figure display unit 45b and at the time of determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. Is obtained.

  Next, the ordinary random number counter C4 will be described. The ordinary random number counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, one by one is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The ordinary random number counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the ordinary drawing execution area 136 at the timing when the game ball wins in the through winning unit 36 in the low probability state. Then, using the stored numerical information of the ordinary random number counter C4, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the branch winning device 37 to the open state.

<Regarding Prerequisite Processing Configuration in MPU 112>
Next, each processing executed to advance the game in the MPU 112 will be described. The processing of the MPU 112 is roughly classified into a main processing started when the power is turned on, and a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S101, a power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until one second elapses after the main process is started without proceeding to the next process. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 114 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 112 is set.

  Thereafter, in a step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch provided in the power / fire control device 108 is manually operated. In a succeeding step S105, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag of the RAM 114 is set to “1”. Is determined. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is performed. In step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the information of the occurrence of the power shutdown is not set, or when the stored data is confirmed to be abnormal by the checksum, the process similarly shifts to the step S108. In step S108, the RAM 114 is cleared as initialization of the RAM 114. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 114 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121 so as to recognize the current game state. I do.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S110 to S113. That is, the MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process. The remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process. In the following step S111, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, a variation counter updating process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 114, the process of adding the read numerical information to 1 is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. After performing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing the timer interrupt process in the MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle. Is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the MPU 112. That is, a pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 112 at intervals of a specific period of 4 milliseconds. The MPU 112 executes processing for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rising or falling of the pulse signal, and starts and executes the timer interrupt processing on the condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form has been confirmed as at least one condition. I do.

  In this case, if the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed from a state where the interrupt is prohibited to a state where the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution state of the processing in the MPU 112, the next timer interrupt processing may be started 4.1 milliseconds after the start of the previous timer interrupt processing, and if such an event occurs, The next timer interrupt process is started 3.9 milliseconds after the immediately preceding timer interrupt process was started.

  However, the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle such as 4 milliseconds regardless of the progress of the processing in the MPU 112. Therefore, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 112 is such that even if the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the timing following the predetermined timing In the timer interrupt processing in the above, the portion exceeding the specific cycle is absorbed, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interruption process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is identified, a power failure processing is executed.

  In a succeeding step S202, a random number updating process for lottery is executed. In the random number updating process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after performing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary random number counter C4, and adding one to each of the read numerical information, Executes a process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, in step S203, a random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S111, and in step S204, a fluctuation counter updating process is executed as in step S112.

  In the following step S205, a fraud detection process is performed to monitor whether a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred. In the fraud detection processing, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the RAM 114 is set to “1”.

  In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, a port output process is performed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing an output corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 35b, 56a, 56b, 63, and 68 is executed. I do. For example, when the information to switch the special power winning device 35 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special power drive unit 35b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. When the information for switching the first special figure prize winning device 33 to the accepting state is set, the output of the drive signal to the first special figure prize winning driving unit 56a is started, and the state is switched to the non-accepting state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. When the information for switching the second special figure prize winning device 34 to the accepting state is set, the output of the drive signal to the second special figure prize winning driving unit 56b is started and the state is switched to the non-accepting state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. When the information to switch the branch winning device 37 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the branch entrance drive unit 63 is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. When the information to switch the switching piece 67 to the retreat position is set, the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 is started. When the information to switch to the guidance position is set, the information is switched. Stop the output of the drive signal.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

  In a succeeding step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the prize detection processing, the signals received from the prize detection sensors 32a to 66c are read, and the general prize section 31, the first special figure normal prize section 32, the first special figure prize device 33, the second special figure prize A process for specifying whether or not a ball has entered the device 34, the special winning device 35, the through winning unit 36, and the branch winning device 37 is executed.

  In a succeeding step S210, a timer updating process for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 114 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is treated collectively, but both the update of the subtraction timer counter and the update of the addition timer counter are collectively performed. It may be configured.

  In a succeeding step S211, a launch control process for performing launch control of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, as described above, one game ball is fired in a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec.

  In subsequent step S212, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208, disconnection confirmation of each of the prize detection sensors 32a to 66c and confirmation of opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. Do.

  In the following step S213, a special figure special electric power control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The processing contents of the special figure special power control processing will be described later in detail.

  In the following step S214, a general-purpose general-electricity control process for executing display control of the general-purpose display unit 46, drive control of the branch winning device 37, and the like is executed. The processing contents of the general-purpose power control processing will be described later in detail.

  In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the first special figure display section 45a in the first special figure hold display section 45c is displayed. The setting and the setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the second special figure display section 45b on the second special figure hold display section 45d are performed. In step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 45a and the second special figure display unit 45b is set based on the processing results of the previous step S213 and step S214. Then, the output information for updating the display content of the ordinary figure display unit 46 is set.

  In a succeeding step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 107 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the subsequent step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed.

  If a positive determination is made in step S206, or after the processes in steps S207 to S218 are performed, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Public control control process>
Next, the general-purpose power control process executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) of the MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, the information of the general-purpose general-purpose counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S301), and the general-purpose general-purpose address table stored in the ROM 113 is read (step S302). Then, a start address corresponding to the information of the general public address counter is acquired from the general public address table (step S303).

  In the general figure control process, the general figure change for monitoring the presence or absence of a prize in the through prize section 36 and for starting the variable display of the picture pattern in the general figure display section 46 in response to the prize in the through prize section 36. The start process (step S305) and the process of changing the general pattern (step S306) for updating the variable display of the pattern in the general figure display unit 46 and for starting the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 when the variable display period has elapsed. ) And a normal power operation process (step S307) for executing the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37. In such a processing configuration, the general-purpose general-purpose counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to know which of the plurality of types of processing is to be executed. A start address of a program for executing the above-described plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general-purpose counter. When the process corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed, the condition of updating the numerical information is satisfied. One is added or “0” is cleared in accordance with the processing executed in the power control processing. Therefore, in the general-purpose general-purpose control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute a process according to the numerical information set in the general-purpose general-purpose counter. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the general-purpose general-purpose counter.

  After executing the process of step S303, in step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S303 is executed. Specifically, if the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is “0”, the process jumps to the general-purpose variation start process of step S305, and if the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is “1”, the process proceeds to step S305. The process jumps to the process during the normal power fluctuation in S306, and jumps to the process during the normal power operation in step S307 if the value of the general power general counter is “2”.

  In the general figure general control process, after performing any one of the steps S305 to S307, a process for performing the opening / closing control of the first special figure winning device 33 (step S308) and the second special figure A process (step S309) for executing opening / closing control of the winning device 34 is executed. Hereinafter, each processing of step S305 to step S309 will be described in detail.

<Public figure fluctuation start processing>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the general-purpose change start process executed in step S305 in the general-purpose general-purpose control process (FIG. 19).

  First, it is determined whether or not the acceptance control of any of the special figure prize winning devices 33, 34 is being executed (step S401). The state in which the acceptance control of one of the special figure prize devices 33 and 34 is being executed means that the first special figure prize is triggered when the game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b of the branch prize device 37. The game ball is detected by a condition in which the condition for bringing the device 33 into the accepting state is satisfied (including a condition in which the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in the accepting state) and a second trigger detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37. The situation where the condition that the second special figure prize winning device 34 is set to the accepting state when the is detected is satisfied (including the situation where the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the accepting state) corresponds. If the acceptance control of any of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed (step S401: YES), a process of determining whether or not a prize has occurred in the through winning unit 36 (step S402). This general-purpose change start process is ended without executing the process. As a result, in the situation where the acceptance control of any of the special figure prize devices 33 and 34 is being executed, the prize of the through prize unit 36 is invalidated, and even if the prize in the through prize unit 36 is generated, the prize is not lost. The variation display of the picture on the figure display unit 46 is not started, and the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not executed.

  Here, the normal figure change start processing is not executed in a state where the change display of the picture on the general figure display unit 46 is being executed and in a state where the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is being executed. Then, even in these situations, the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalidated. In other words, the situation in which the picture variation display is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 46, the situation in which the opening and closing control of the branch prize device 37 is performed, and the acceptance control of any of the special figure prize devices 33 and 34 are performed. In this situation, winning in the through winning unit 36 is invalidated, and in other situations, winning in the through winning unit 36 is enabled. In this case, even in the open / close execution mode, winning in the through winning unit 36 is validated. Then, when a valid winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs in the open / close execution mode, the same processing as in the low frequency support mode is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the opening / closing execution mode, when a valid winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, the same processing as the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode is executed. In the open / close execution mode, the winning in the through winning unit 36 may be invalidated.

  In a situation where the acceptance control has not been executed for both the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 (step S401: NO) and a prize has been generated in the through prize winning unit 36. (Step S402: YES), it is determined whether the flag corresponding to any of the high-probability states in the RAM 114 is set to “1”, thereby determining which of the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state. Is determined (step S403). If the state is the low probability state (step S403: NO), an open lottery process is executed (step S404). In the open lottery process, the current numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is read into the general-purpose execution area 136. Then, the open lottery table is read out from the ROM 113, and it is grasped by referring to the open lottery table whether or not the numerical information read out to the execution area 136 for ordinary drawing is numerical information corresponding to the open winning. The grasp result is stored in the RAM 114. Thereafter, numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds as a fluctuation display period for the low probability state is set in a general-purpose fluctuation measurement counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S405). On the other hand, in the case of the first high probability state (step S403 and step S406: YES), the numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds as the fluctuation display period for the first high probability state is stored in the RAM 114 in the normal figure fluctuation measurement. The value is set in the counter (step S407). If the current state is the second high probability state (step S403: YES, step S406: NO), the numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds as the variable display period for the second high probability state is stored in the RAM 114 in the normal state. The value is set in the fluctuation measurement counter (step S408). Every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed, the value set in the normal figure fluctuation measurement counter is decremented by one. Then, when the value of the general-purpose variation measurement counter becomes “0” from a state of 1 or more, the MPU 112 specifies that it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46.

  After executing any of the processes of step S405, step S407, and step S408, the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 46 is started (step S409). In this case, even if any of the processes of step S405, step S407, and step S408 is executed, the pattern displayed on the general-purpose display unit 46 at the start timing of the variable display of the pattern is the same. In this way, in any situation, it is possible to start the variable display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 46 in the same manner, and thus it is possible to reduce the processing load. In addition, before the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display section 46 is started, the state in which the display of the pattern finally stopped and displayed in the previous variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display section 46 is continued. Has become. Thereafter, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is incremented by 1 (step S410). As a result, the execution target of the processing in the normal-figure normal-power control processing (FIG. 19) is the normal-fluctuating processing (step S306).

<Processing during normal map fluctuation>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the normal-floor fluctuation processing executed in step S306 in the normal-figure normal power control processing (FIG. 19).

  In the general-floor fluctuation processing, if the value of the general-figure fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114 is 1 or more (step S501: NO), it means that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation display of the pattern on the general-figure display unit 46. Therefore, the display content is updated (step S502). In the update process of the display content, the pattern to be displayed on the general-purpose display unit 46 is updated to the next pattern in order to update the display content of the general-purpose display unit 46. In this case, regardless of whether the state is the low-probability state, the first high-probability state, or the second high-probability state, the pattern updating mode is constant, and in the low-probability state, the open lottery process determines that the winning has been achieved. Regardless of whether or not the pattern has been updated, the pattern updating mode is constant. In this way, in any situation, it is possible to update the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46 in the same manner, and thus it is possible to reduce the processing load.

  If it is the end timing of the variation display of the picture on the general-figure display unit 46 (step S501: YES), if it is in the low-probability state (step S503: NO), the step S404 is opened in the general-figure variation start processing (FIG. 20). It is determined whether or not the winning has been achieved in the lottery process (step S504). If the open winning has not been achieved (step S504: NO), the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter in the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S505). As a result, the execution target of the process in the general-purpose power control process (FIG. 19) is the general-purpose change start process (step S305).

  If it is in the low probability state (step S503: NO) and the winning has been achieved (step S504: YES), “1” is set to the ordinary power release number counter provided in the RAM 114 and the The numerical information corresponding to the short open period of 0.1 second is set in the ordinary power open period counter (step S506). On the other hand, when it is the end timing of the variable display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 (step S501: YES), and when the state is the first high probability state (step S503 and step S507: YES), the general call of the RAM 114 is performed. The number-of-opens counter is set to “1”, and numerical information corresponding to 0.8 seconds, which is the long open period, is set to the ordinary power open period counter of the RAM 114 (step S508). Also, when it is the end timing of the change display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 (step S501: YES), and when the state is the second high probability state (step S503: YES, step S507: NO), the RAM 114 In addition to setting "2" in the normal power release counter, numerical information corresponding to the short open period of 0.1 second is set in the normal power release period counter of the RAM 114 (step S509). The general power release counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of times that the branch winning device 37 is to be opened by the MPU 112 in a situation where the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. The ordinary power open period counter is a counter for specifying the maximum remaining time until the branch winning device 37 is closed when the branch winning device 37 is in the open state by the MPU 112. The value set in the ordinary power release period counter is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the ordinary power release period counter changes from “1” or more to “0”, it is determined that the current timing of opening the branch winning device 37 is the end timing.

  When any one of steps S506, S508, and S509 has been executed, a process of switching to the retreat position is executed (step S510). In the switching process, the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 of the branch winning device 37 is started, so that the switching piece 67 is displaced from the guidance position to the retracted position. Further, numerical information corresponding to 0.9 seconds which is a switching standby period is set in a switching standby counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S511). The value set in the switching standby counter is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the switching standby counter changes from “1” or more to “0”, it is specified that it is time to switch the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guidance position.

  Thereafter, an opening process of the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S512). In the opening process, the output of the drive signal to the branch entrance drive unit 63 is started, so that the branch side opening / closing member 62 is displaced to the open position. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened. When the branch winning device 37 is in the open state, the open state flag provided in the RAM 114 is set to “1”. The MPU 112 can specify whether or not the branch winning device 37 is in the open state by checking whether or not “1” is set in the open state flag.

  Further, numerical information corresponding to the monitoring period of the prize is set in the monitoring period counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S513). During the monitoring period of the opportunity prize, when a game ball is detected by any one of the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch prize device 37, the detection of the game ball is due to a fraud. This is a period serving as a reference for specifying whether or not the condition is satisfied. If a game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b or the second opportunity detection sensor 66c during the measurement of the opportunity win monitoring period, the detection of the game ball is treated as normal, and the monitoring of the opportunity win is performed. If a game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b or the second opportunity detection sensor 66c after the elapse of the period, the detection of the game ball is treated as abnormal. In the first winning probability state, the monitoring period of the winning prize is the opening continuation period in one opening of the branch prize device 37, and the game ball that has won the branch prize device 37 receives the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger. The period is set as a period that is equal to or longer than the sum of the maximum period assumed as the period until detection by any of the detection sensors 66c. Specifically, it is set to 2.0 seconds. In addition, in the case of the second high probability state, the opening continuation period in the first opening time of the branch winning device 37, the closing continuation period between the first opening time and the second opening time of the branch winning device 37, The opening continuation period in the second opening of the branch prize device 37 and the period until the game ball winning the branch prize device 37 is detected by any of the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. The period is set as a period equal to or longer than the sum of the assumed maximum period. Specifically, it is set to 3.0 seconds. By setting the monitoring period of the opportunity winning in this way, it is specified whether or not the detection of the game ball by the first opportunity detecting sensor 66b and the second opportunity detecting sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 is normal. It is possible to do.

  Thereafter, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter in the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S514). As a result, the execution target of the process in the general-purpose power control process (FIG. 19) is the general power operation process (step S307).

<Process during normal operation>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a normal power operation process executed in step S307 in the normal power control process (FIG. 19).

  When the branch prize device 37 is in the open state (step S601: YES), it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the branch prize detection sensor 66a of the branch prize device 37, thereby winning the branch prize device 37. It is determined whether or not has occurred (step S602). If no prize has been generated in the branch prize device 37 (step S602: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary power open period counter of the RAM 114 is “0”, whereby the branch prize device 37 is determined. It is determined whether or not the opening continuation period of the current opening has elapsed (step S603).

  If the open continuation period has elapsed (step S603: YES), the value of the ordinary power open counter in the RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S604). If the value of the ordinary power opening counter after the subtraction is not “0” (step S605: NO), the process of closing the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S606). In the closing process, the output of the drive signal to the branch entrance drive unit 63 is stopped, so that the branch-side opening / closing member 62 is displaced to the closed position. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is closed. When the branch winning device 37 is in the closed state, the open state flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, numerical information corresponding to 0.8 seconds, which is a closing continuation period, is set in a normal power closing period counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S607). The value set in the ordinary power closing period counter is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the normal electricity closing period counter has changed from “1” or more to “0”, it is specified that the closing continuation period in the branch winning device 37 has elapsed.

  When a prize has occurred in the branch prize winning device 37 (step S602: YES), or when the value of the ordinary power opening counter after subtracting 1 is “0” (step S605: YES), the same as step S606. Then, the closing process of the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S608). As a result, the branch winning device 37 is closed. Thereafter, "1" is set to the release end flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S609). The open end flag specifies, by the MPU 112, that the transition from the open state to the closed state of the branch prize device 37 has all been completed in the current opening / closing control of the branch prize device 37 triggered by the prize in the through prize unit 36. This is a flag for performing

  If the branch prize device 37 is in the closed state (step S601: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ordinary power closing period counter of the RAM 114 is “0”, and the closing continuation period of the branch prize device 37 is determined. Is determined (step S610). If the closing continuation period has elapsed (step S610: YES), the process of opening the branch prize winning device 37 is executed (step S611) as in step S512 in the process of changing the ordinary figure (FIG. 21). As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened. In the opening process, numerical information corresponding to 0.8 seconds, which is a long opening period, is set in a normal power opening period counter of the RAM 114. As a result, in the current opening cycle, the branch winning device 37 is opened for a maximum of 0.8 seconds.

  In the normal power operation process, it is determined whether or not the value of the switching standby counter of the RAM 114 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the switching standby period has elapsed (step S612). If the switching standby period has elapsed (step S612: YES), a process of switching to the guidance position is performed (step S613). In the switching process, the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 of the branch winning device 37 is stopped, so that the switching piece 67 is displaced from the retracted position to the guidance position. Thereafter, "1" is set to the switching completion flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S614). The switching completion flag is a flag for specifying by the MPU 112 that the switching of the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guidance position is completed.

  In the normal power operation process, when both the open end flag and the switching completion flag of the RAM 114 are set to “1” (step S615: YES), the value of the normal power general counter of the RAM 114 is cleared to “0”. (Step S616). As a result, the execution target of the process in the general-purpose power control process (FIG. 19) is the general-purpose change start process (step S305). In step S616, the release end flag and the switching completion flag are cleared to "0". When the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is cleared to “0” on condition that both the open end flag and the switching completion flag are set to “1”, a prize in the through prize section 36 is triggered. In the situation where the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is performed, in this opening and closing control, the transition from the open state to the closed state of the branch winning device 37 is all completed, and the arrangement of the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guide position is completed. It ends with that.

<Control processing of first special figure prize winning device 33>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the control processing of the first special figure prize winning device 33, which is executed in step S308 in the normal figure general power control processing (FIG. 19).

  If the first special figure prize winning device 33 is not in the receiving state (step S701: NO), the condition is that a game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37 (step S702: YES). By determining whether or not the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the monitoring period of the trigger prize is being measured (step S703).

  If the monitoring of the opportunity winning prize is being measured (step S703: YES), it is provided in the RAM 114 because it means that the detection of the current game ball by the first opportunity detecting sensor 66b is normal. The second special figure winning counter is set to "2" (step S704). The first special figure winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining winning number of game balls required for switching the first special figure winning device 33 from the accepting state to the non-accepting state by the MPU 112. By setting “2” to the first special figure prize winning device in step S704, when the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in the accepting state, two games are stored in the first special figure prize winning device 33. When the ball wins, the first special figure prize winning device 33 enters a non-accepting state. After that, an acceptance start process of the first special figure prize winning device 33 is executed (step S705). In the acceptance start process, the first special figure prize winning device 33 is set to the acceptance state by starting to output a drive signal to the first special figure prize driving unit 56a. When the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in the receiving state, the first special figure side receiving state flag provided in the RAM 114 is set to “1”. The MPU 112 can determine whether the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in the accepting state by checking whether the first special figure side accepting state flag is set to “1”. Becomes

  On the other hand, in step S703, if the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is “0”, that is, if the measurement of the monitoring period of the prize has been completed, the detection of the current game ball by the first trigger detection sensor 66b Is not legitimate. Therefore, after setting the abnormality notification command as a transmission target to the sound emission control device 121 (step S706), the process enters an infinite loop. Upon receiving the abnormality notification command, the sound emission control device 121 executes a process for causing at least one of the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the abnormality notification. Thereby, it is notified that the abnormality detection has occurred in the first opportunity detection sensor 66b. Further, by entering the infinite loop, execution of the processing for advancing the game in the MPU 112 is prevented. Note that the state of the infinite loop is released by executing the processing of step S108 in the main processing (FIG. 17).

  When the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in the receiving state (step S701: YES), it is determined whether or not a prize has occurred in the first special figure prize winning device 33 (step S707). If a prize has occurred in the first special figure prize winning device 33 (step S707: YES), the value of the first special figure prize counter in the RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S708). Then, if the value of the first special figure prize counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S709: YES), the reception ending process of the first special figure prize winning device 33 is executed (step S710). In the acceptance ending process, the output of the drive signal to the first special figure prize winning drive unit 56a is stopped, thereby bringing the first special figure prize winning device 33 into the non-accepting state. When the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in the non-accepting state, the first special figure side receiving state flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to “0”.

<Control processing of second special map winning device 34>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the control processing of the second special figure prize winning device 34, which is executed in step S309 in the normal figure general control processing (FIG. 19).

  When the second special figure prize winning device 34 is not in the receiving state (step S801: NO), the condition is that the game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 (step S802: YES). By determining whether or not the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the monitoring period for the prize is being measured (step S803).

  If the monitoring of the opportunity winning prize is being measured (step S803: YES), it is provided in the RAM 114 because it means that the detection of the current game ball by the second opportunity detecting sensor 66c is normal. The second special figure winning counter is set to "2" (step S804). The second special figure winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining winning number of game balls required for switching the second special figure winning device 34 from the accepting state to the non-accepting state by the MPU 112. By setting “2” to the second special figure prize winning device in step S804, when the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state, two games are stored in the second special figure prize winning device 34. When the ball wins, the second special figure winning device 34 enters a non-accepting state. Thereafter, the reception start process of the second special figure prize winning device 34 is executed (step S805). In the acceptance start processing, the output of the drive signal to the second special figure prize winning drive unit 56b is started, so that the second special figure prize winning device 34 is set to the accepting state. When the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state, “1” is set to the second special figure side receiving state flag provided in the RAM 114. The MPU 112 can specify whether the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the accepting state by checking whether the second special figure side accepting state flag is set to “1”. Becomes

  On the other hand, in step S803, if the value of the monitoring period counter of the RAM 114 is “0”, that is, if the measurement of the monitoring period of the prize has been completed, the detection of the current game ball by the second trigger detection sensor 66c Is not legitimate. Therefore, after setting the abnormality notification command as a transmission target to the sound emission control device 121 (step S806), the process enters an infinite loop. Upon receiving the abnormality notification command, the sound emission control device 121 executes a process for causing at least one of the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the abnormality notification. Thereby, it is notified that the abnormality detection has occurred in the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. Further, by entering the infinite loop, execution of the processing for advancing the game in the MPU 112 is prevented. Note that the state of the infinite loop is released by executing the processing of step S108 in the main processing (FIG. 17).

  When the second special figure prize device 34 is in the receiving state (step S801: YES), it is determined whether or not a prize has occurred in the second special figure prize device 34 (step S807). If a prize has occurred in the second special figure prize winning device 34 (step S807: YES), the value of the second special figure prize counter in the RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S808). If the value of the second special figure prize winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S809: YES), the reception ending process of the second special figure prize winning device 34 is executed (step S810). In the acceptance ending process, the output of the drive signal to the second special figure prize winning drive unit 56b is stopped, thereby bringing the second special figure prize winning device 34 into the non-accepting state. When the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, the second special figure side receiving state flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to “0”.

<Winning monitoring process>
Here, the winning detection processing executed in step S209 of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 36a of the through winning unit 36 (step S901: YES), a condition is that the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter in the RAM 114 is “0” (step S902: YES). ), “1” is set to a through-win prize flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S903). As a result, the winning in the through winning unit 36 is invalidated in a situation where the pattern change display is being performed on the ordinary figure display unit 46 and a situation where the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is being performed. In addition, the MPU 112 determines whether or not a prize has occurred in the through prize unit 36 by determining whether or not “1” is set in the through prize flag in step S402 in the ordinary figure change start process (FIG. 20). Determine whether or not. In this case, if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the through-win prize flag is cleared to "0" even if the processing after step S402 is not executed. Thereby, when any of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 is in the receiving state, the winning in the through prize winning portion 36 is invalidated. Also, when the affirmative determination is made in step S402, the through winning flag is cleared to "0". Incidentally, even if one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 36a of the through winning unit 36, the processing for executing payout of the game ball is not executed.

  When one game ball is detected by the branch prize detection sensor 66a of the branch prize device 37 (step S904: YES), the value of the three prize ball counter provided in the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S905). The three award ball counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of transmissions of the three award ball commands for instructing the payout control device 107 to pay out three game balls by the MPU 112. If the value of the three-prize-ball counter is 1 or more when the transmission is possible, one three-prize-ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 107 and the value of the three-prize-ball counter is decremented by one. Is done. Thereafter, "1" is set to the branch winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S906). The MPU 112 determines whether or not a prize has occurred in the branch prize device 37 by determining whether or not “1” is set in the branch prize flag in step S602 in the normal power operation process (FIG. 22). Is determined. If a positive determination is made in step S602, the branch winning flag is cleared to "0".

  When one game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37 (step S907: YES), “1” is set to the first opportunity winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S908). . The MPU 112 determines in step S702 in the control process (FIG. 23) of the first special map winning device 33 whether or not the first opportunity winning flag is set to "1", and thereby the first opportunity detection sensor 66b It is determined whether or not a game ball has been detected. If a positive determination is made in step S702, the first opportunity winning flag is cleared to "0". Incidentally, even if one game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the process for executing payout of the game ball is not executed.

  When one game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 (step S909: YES), "1" is set to a second opportunity winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S910). . The MPU 112 determines in step S802 in the control process (FIG. 24) of the second special map prize winning device 34 whether or not the second opportunity prize flag is set to "1", and thereby the second opportunity detection sensor 66c It is determined whether or not a game ball has been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the second opportunity prize flag is cleared to "0". Incidentally, even if one game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the processing for executing payout of the game ball is not executed.

  When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 32a of the first special figure normal winning unit 32 (step S911: YES), the value of the three prize ball counter of the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as in step S905 (step S905). S912). As a result, processing for paying out three game balls is executed. Thereafter, "1" is set to the first special figure winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S913). In the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26), it is determined whether or not the first special figure winning flag is set to "1". It is determined whether or not a winning of one game ball has occurred. By the way, in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 26), the first special figure normal prize unit 32 or the first special figure prize device 33 is executed when the processing corresponding to one game ball winning is executed. The figure winning flag is cleared to "0".

  When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the first special figure prize winning device 33 (step S914: YES), the value of the three prize ball counter of the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as in step S905 (step S915). ). As a result, processing for paying out three game balls is executed. Thereafter, "1" is set to a first winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S916), and "1" is set to a first special figure winning flag in the RAM 114 (step S917). The first special figure winning flag is as described above. The MPU 112 determines whether or not the first winning flag is set to “1” in step S707 in the control process (FIG. 23) of the first special figure winning device 33, and thereby the first special figure winning device 33. It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the first winning flag is cleared to "0".

  When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure prize winning device 34 (step S918: YES), the value of the three prize ball counter of the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as in step S905 (step S919). ). As a result, processing for paying out three game balls is executed. Thereafter, "1" is set to a second winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S920), and "1" is set to a second special figure winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S921). The MPU 112 determines in step S807 in the control process (FIG. 24) of the second special figure prize winning device 34 whether or not the second winning flag is set to "1". It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred. If a positive determination is made in step S807, the second winning flag is cleared to "0". Also, in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 26), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second special figure winning flag, so that one game ball to the second special figure winning device 34 is transmitted. It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred. Incidentally, the second special figure winning flag is cleared to "0" when executing the processing corresponding to winning of one game ball to the second special figure winning device 34 in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 26). .

  In the winning detection process, other processes are executed in addition to the above processes (step S922). In other processes, when a prize has occurred in the general prize section 31, a process for paying out a corresponding number of game balls is executed, and the detection sensor 35c of the special electric prize device 35 If one game ball has been detected, a process for paying out the corresponding number of game balls is executed.

<Tokuzu Tokuden control processing>
Next, the special figure special power control processing executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special power control process, first, a process of acquiring hold information is executed (step S1001). In the process of acquiring the hold information, when the first special figure winning flag of the RAM 114 is set to “1”, it is specified that a winning has occurred in the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning apparatus 33. I do. In this case, if the upper limit number (specifically, four) of the hold information is not stored in the first special map holding area 133, each numerical value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random counter C3 is used. The information is stored in the first area among the empty areas 133a to 133d of the first special figure reservation area 133. In addition, in the process of acquiring the hold information, if “1” is set in the second special figure prize winning flag of the RAM 114, it is specified that a prize has occurred in the second special figure prize winning device 34. In this case, if the upper limit number (specifically, four) of the hold information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134, each numerical value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used. The information is stored in the first area among the free areas 134a to 134d of the second special figure reservation area 134.

  Thereafter, information of the special figure special power counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S1002), and a special figure special power address table is read from the ROM 113 (step S1003). Then, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step S1004).

  The special figure special power control processing includes a special figure change start processing (step S1006) for starting an effect for a game round, a special figure changing process for progressing an effect for a game round (step S1007), The special figure determination process (Step S1008) for terminating the effect for the game round, the special power start process (Step S1009) for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the state where the special power prize device 35 is open Special power opening process for controlling (step 1010), special power closing process for controlling the closed state of the special winning device 35 (step S1011), ending of the open / close execution mode, and termination of the open / close execution mode A special power ending process (step S1012) for controlling the transition of the gaming state is set. In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to know which of the plurality of types of processing is to be executed. A start address of a program for executing the plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special power counter. The special figure special power counter starts the special figure special power control in the next processing cycle when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. In accordance with the processing executed in the processing, 1 is added, 1 is subtracted, or “0” is cleared. Therefore, in the special figure special power control processing in each processing cycle, it is sufficient to execute a processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special power counter. The special figure special power counter is set to “0” as an initial value.

  After executing the process of step S1004, in step S1005, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S1004 is executed. Specifically, when the value of the special figure special power counter is “0”, the process jumps to the special figure change start processing in step S1006. In the special figure change start processing, on the condition that the hold information is stored on hold, various determination processings are executed, and a game round in which the change display is performed on the symbol display device 41 and the special figure display units 45a and 45b is started. Execute the processing for The details will be described later.

  If the value of the special figure special power counter is “1”, the processing jumps to the special figure changing processing in step S1007. In the special figure fluctuation process, a process is performed to determine whether or not the timing is before the final stop display during the game continuation display period, and if the timing is before the final stop display, the fluctuation is performed in the current game round. Processing for regularly changing the display mode of the picture on the special figure display sections 45a and 45b to be displayed is executed. By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, the above-described process for regularly changing is executed. The in-flight processing ends. Therefore, after the effect for the game round is started, the special figure changing process is activated every time the special figure special power control process is activated until the final stop display timing comes. Also, when the timing for the final stop display comes, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the processing corresponding to the special figure changing processing to the special figure fixing processing. Update to the corresponding one.

  If the value of the special figure special power counter is “2”, the process jumps to the special figure fixing process in step S1008. In the special figure determination process, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121 in order to cause the symbol display device 41 to display the stop result of the current game round as a final stop, and the fluctuation display target is displayed in the current game round. Are displayed on the special figure display sections 45a and 45b in accordance with the lottery result of the current game. In the special figure fixing process, it is determined whether or not the period during the final stop display has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a shift to the open / close execution mode occurs. Then, when a shift to the open / close execution mode occurs, a process for the mode shift is executed. By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure fixing process until the final stop display period has elapsed, the special figure finalizing process is ended when the period has not elapsed. Therefore, after the final stop display is started, the special figure fixing process is activated every time the special figure special power control process is activated until the period during the final stop display elapses. In addition, when the period during the final stop display has elapsed, when the shift to the open / close execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is cleared to “0”, and the shift to the open / close execution mode occurs. Then, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure fixing process to the one corresponding to the special power start process.

  If the value of the special figure special power counter is "3", the process jumps to the special power starting process of step S1009. In the special power start process, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121. Thus, the opening effect is started on the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. In the special power starting process, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the present special power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special power start process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the opening period elapses. When the opening period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power start processing to the one corresponding to the special power open processing. .

  If the value of the special figure special power counter is “4”, the process jumps to the special power releasing processing in step S1010. In the special power opening process, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. At the start of one round game, the special power winning device 35 is opened. If the end condition of the round game is not satisfied, the process for monitoring the establishment of the end condition is executed after the process for monitoring the establishment of the end condition is terminated, instead of waiting in the special power opening process. If the above termination condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one to change the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power open processing to the one corresponding to the special power closed processing. Update.

  If the value of the special figure special power counter is "5", the process jumps to the special power closing process of step S1011. In the special power closing process, a process for ending one round game is executed. In this case, the special electric winning device 35 is closed. In the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. If the interval period has not elapsed, this special power closing process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power closing process. Therefore, when the interval period is started, until the time period elapses, the special power closing process is activated each time the special power special power control process is activated. When the interval period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is decremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power closing processing to the one corresponding to the special power opening processing. I do. On the other hand, in the special power closing process for the last round game, after performing the process of terminating one round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, and the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special power closing process. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special power termination process.

  If the value of the special figure special power counter is "6", the process jumps to the special power ending processing in step S1012. In the special power ending process, an ending command indicating that the open / close execution mode is ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121. Thus, the ending effect is started by the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. In the special power ending process, it is determined whether the ending period of the open / close execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not elapsed, the present special power ending process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power ending process. Therefore, after the ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special power ending process is activated each time the special figure special power control process is activated until the ending period elapses. Also, when the ending period has elapsed, after executing the game state transition processing, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is cleared to “0” so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special power end processing. Update to the one corresponding to the special figure change start process.

  In the gaming state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a low-probability response result, the low probability that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is low probability. A process for setting the gaming state to the state is executed. In addition, if the jackpot result that triggered the shift of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the first highly accurate response result, the first success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. A process for setting the gaming state to the high probability state is executed. If the jackpot result that triggered the shift of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second high-accuracy correspondence result, the second winning determination mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the second high frequency support mode. A process for setting the gaming state to the high probability state is executed.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start processing (step S1006).

  In the special figure change start processing, the data setting processing is executed on condition that the hold information is stored in one of the first special figure hold area 133 and the second special figure hold area 134 (step S1101: YES). (Step S1102). In the data setting process, when the hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, regardless of whether the hold information is stored in the first special figure holding area 133, The hold information stored in the first area 134a of the area 134 is moved to the special map execution area 135. Thereafter, a process of shifting the hold information stored in each of the areas 134a to 134d of the second special figure holding area 134 is executed. In this data shift processing, the data in the first area 134a is cleared, and the second area 134b → the first area 134a, the third area 134c → the second area 134b, the fourth area 134d → the third area 134c, and so on. The data in the area is shifted. In the data setting process, if the hold information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134 and the hold information is further stored in the first special figure holding area 133, the first special figure holding area The suspension information stored in the first area 133a is moved to the special map execution area 135. Thereafter, a process of shifting the hold information stored in each of the areas 133a to 133d of the first special figure holding area 133 is executed. In this data shift process, the data in the first area 133a is cleared, and the second area 133b → the first area 133a, the third area 133c → the second area 133b, the fourth area 133d → the third area 133c, and so on. The data in the area is shifted. By executing the data setting process as described above, if the hold information is stored in both the first special figure holding area 133 and the second special figure holding area 134, the second special figure winning device 34 , The hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 corresponding to the game priority is prioritized as the game start start object.

  After that, a success / failure determination process is executed (step S1103). In the success / failure determination process, it is first determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, referring to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the ROM 113, the information for judging the success / failure of the information stored in the execution area 135 for the special figure, that is, the hit random number counter C1 It is determined whether or not the numerical information obtained from the above matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. When the mode is the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the random number counter C1 stored in the special figure execution area 135 is referred to by referring to the low probability mode hit / fail table provided in the ROM 113. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical information for probability.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S1104). If it is a jackpot winning result (step S1104: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S1105). In the distribution determination process, if the current game time is triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 133, the distribution table for the first special figure (FIG. 14A) is referred to. Then, of the information stored in the special map execution area 135, it is specified which jackpot result the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. On the other hand, in the distribution determination processing, if the current game time is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, the distribution table for the second special figure (FIG. 14B) is used. With reference to the information stored in the special map execution area 135, the CPU 11 specifies which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the big hit result is executed (step S1106). Specifically, the information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display sections 45a and 45b, which are the fluctuation display targets in this game round, is stored in the ROM 113 in advance for the jackpot result. The specified information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 114. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 45a and 45b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  Thereafter, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S1107). Specifically, the RAM 114 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S1107, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the flag corresponds to the distribution determination result in step S1105. "1" is set for the flag.

  On the other hand, when the result is not a jackpot winning result (step S1104: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S1108). Specifically, the information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 45a and 45b, which are the fluctuation display targets in the current game round, is stored in the ROM 113 in advance for the stop result for the deviation result. The specified information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 114. In this case, the information on the pattern aspect selected is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing any one of the steps S1107 and S1108, a display continuation period acquiring process is executed (step S1109). In this processing, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is obtained. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the current change start correspond to the jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. In addition, if neither the jackpot result nor the numerical information obtained from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the special figure execution area 135 is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, the reach display is generated. judge. If it is determined that the reach display will occur, the display duration period corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 113. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113. I do. Incidentally, the display continuation period that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display continuation period that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display continuation table.

  Then, the information of the display continuation period acquired in step S1109 is set in the special figure special power timer counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S1110). The value set in the timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer update process (FIG. 18) is executed.

  After that, the change command and the type command are set as transmission targets to the sound emission control device 121 (step S1111). The change command includes information on the display continuation period. Here, as described above, the display continuation period obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display continuation period obtained by referring to the reach occurrence display continuation table. Even if the information about whether or not reach has occurred is not included in the command for voice, the sound emission control device 121 can specify whether or not the reach has occurred from the information on the display continuation period. The type command includes information on the game result. When the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 121, the display light emitting unit 18 a, the speaker unit 18 b, and the symbol display device 41 start an effect for playing a game. The effect for the game round is executed over the display continuation period acquired in step S1109.

  Thereafter, the display of the variation of the picture is started on the special figure display sections 45a and 45b which are the display targets of the variation of the current game (step S1112). In this case, when the current game time is triggered by the hold information in the first special figure holding area 133, the variable display of the pattern on the first special figure display section 45a is started, and the current game time is changed to the second special figure. If the hold information in the hold area 134 has been triggered, the variation display of the picture on the second special figure display unit 45b is started. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1113). As a result, the processing to be executed in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 26) becomes the special figure changing processing (step S1007).

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Not only is the payout of the game ball performed when the game ball enters the branch winning device 37, but also the game ball that has entered is located downstream of the first lead-out region 65c and the second lead region of the branch winning device 37. By flowing into any one of 65d, a benefit different from the payout of game balls is provided. As a result, a plurality of benefits are provided when the game ball enters the branch winning device 37, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the game ball enters the branch winning device 37. Become. In this case, the branch prize detection device 37 detects the game prize flowing down the branch passage 65 on the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c or on the upstream side of the switching piece 67 for guiding the game ball to one of the second derivation regions 65d. A sensor 66a is provided, and when a game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, payout of the game ball is executed, and further, the first lead-out area 65c or the second lead-out area downstream of the switching piece 67. When a game ball flows into the area 65d, a privilege different from the payout of the game ball is given. Thereby, even if the passage length dimension of the passage area downstream of the first lead-out area 65c or the passage area continuing to the second lead-out area 65d is increased, the payout of the game ball for the game ball entering the branch winning device 37 is provided. This can be done early. Accordingly, the passage configuration of the passage area continuing to the downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c or the second lead-out area 65d while allowing the payout of the game ball in response to the game ball entering the branch winning device 37 to be performed early. The degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  When the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c, the first special figure prize device 33 that generates an opportunity to acquire the hold information to be subjected to the success / failure determination process is generated. In the receiving state, when the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the second derivation region 65d, the second special figure prize device 34 that generates an opportunity to acquire the hold information to be subjected to the success / failure determination process. Becomes the receiving state. Then, the second special feature is compared to the case where the hit / fail determination processing is performed on the hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as first hold information) acquired when the game ball enters the first special map winning device 33. In the configuration, it is more advantageous for the player to execute the hit / fail judgment processing on the hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as second hold information) acquired when a game ball enters the winning device 34 in FIG. is there. Thereby, the player expects that the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 will be guided to the second derivation area 65d, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the first high-probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 reliably flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c, while in the second high-probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 Surely flows into the second lead-out area 65d. This makes it possible to create a state where a game ball easily flows into the first derivation area 65c and a state where a game ball easily flows into the second deduction area 65d.

  Further, when a game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c, the first special figure prize winning device 33, which is a trigger for acquiring the first hold information, enters an accepting state, and the game ball enters the second derivation area 65d. In the case of the inflow, the second special figure prize winning device 34, which is a trigger for obtaining the second hold information, is in the receiving state. Then, as described above, it is more advantageous for the player when the second suspension information is subjected to the success / failure determination process than when the first suspension information is subjected to the success / failure determination process. Therefore, the player not only expects to be in any of the high probability states, but also expects to be in the second high probability state than the first high probability state. Thereby, it is possible to make the player's sense of expectation stepwise, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In a configuration in which the through winning section 36 and the branch winning apparatus 37 are provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA, game balls are supplied to a position upstream of the through winning section 36 and the branch winning apparatus 37 in the right area PA3. There is provided a first distribution mechanism 71 and a second distribution mechanism 72 that sequentially change the distribution direction in response to this. The first distribution mechanism 71 is provided on the upstream side of the second distribution mechanism 72, and the game balls distributed when the first distribution mechanism 71 is in the predetermined distribution direction are separated by the second distribution mechanism 72. Supplied to When a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in a state where the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in the first distribution state, the game is directed to the through winning section 36. When a ball is supplied and a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in a state where the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in the second distribution state, the ball is directed toward the branch entrance 61. Game balls are supplied. Thereby, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls can be supplied toward the through-winning portion 36, and the branch entrance 61 It is possible to supply game balls to the player. Also, by appropriately designing the configurations of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the frequency at which the game balls are supplied to the through winning portion 36 and the game balls are supplied to the branch entrance 61. The frequency can be set to a frequency desired by the designer. Furthermore, it becomes possible to supply the game ball to the branch entrance 61 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball was supplied to the through winning unit 36, and the game ball entered the through winning unit 36. Based on this, when the branch winning device 37 is opened, it is possible to reliably supply the game balls to the branch winning device 37 in the open state.

  When nine game balls are supplied as a specific number to the first distribution mechanism 71, the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round. Thus, by supplying the game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls can be repeatedly distributed in a certain mode.

  Only the game balls sorted by the first sorting mechanism 71 and the second sorting mechanism 72 can enter the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37. Thereby, it becomes easy to design the frequency of balls entering the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 to a desired frequency.

  The game balls to be supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 three times later than the game balls distributed to the through winning portion 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 toward the branch entrance 61. Will be sorted. As a result, it is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36 to when the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37. Therefore, when the branch winning device 37 is opened based on the game ball entering the through winning portion 36, the game ball is reliably supplied to the branch winning device 37 which is in the opened state. In this case, it is possible to secure a period until the branch winning device 37 is opened when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36.

  Before the first distributing mechanism 71 and the second distributing mechanism 72 distribute game balls toward the through winning unit 36 from the state of distributing game balls toward the branch winning device 37, the distributing directions are determined. The game balls are distributed in different distribution directions. Thus, by utilizing the period in which the game balls are distributed to a side different from the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37, the game balls enter the through winning unit 36, and then the game balls are transmitted to the branch winning device 37. It is possible to secure a relatively long period of time until the is supplied.

  Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the through prize winning portion 36, the variation display of the pattern is executed on the general-purpose display portion 46, and when the variation display of the pattern ends, the branch winning device 37 is opened. In this configuration, as described above, a certain period from when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36 to when the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37 is secured to a certain degree, so that the game ball enters the through winning unit 36. When the branch prize device 37 is opened based on the fact that the ball has entered, the branch prize device 37 is reliably supplied to the open branch prize device 37 in the open state. It is possible to secure a period during which the variable display of the pattern is executed on the general-purpose display unit 46 before the icon is opened.

  In the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state, when a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, a game prize is supplied to the through prize unit 36 and then a branch prize device. The variation display of the pattern is performed on the general-purpose display unit 46 for a specific period equal to or less than a period required until the game ball is supplied to 37. Accordingly, in a situation where the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the first high probability state or the second high probability state, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism are provided. When the game balls distributed by the ball 72 enter the through prize winning section 36, the game balls distributed next to the branch winning device 37 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are supplied to the branch entrance 61. It is possible to make the branch prize winning device 37 open before reaching.

  On the other hand, in the low probability state, when the branch prize device 37 is opened based on the game ball having entered the through winning unit 36, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle. Even if it is performed, at the timing when the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37, the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 has already been completed, and the branch winning device 37 is in the closed state. Thereby, even if the branch winning device 37 can be opened in the low probability state, it is substantially impossible for game balls to enter the branch winning device 37. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the first high probability state and the second high probability state.

  Regardless of the first high probability state or the second high probability state, the shortest firing cycle of the game balls distributed to the through winning unit 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is 3 The game ball supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 after the ball enters the branch winning device 37 in the open state, while the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 in the first high probability state is surely inserted. The opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is performed such that the game ball that has flowed into the downstream side of the first deriving region 65c and that has entered the branch winning device 37 in the second high probability state surely flows into the second deriving region 65d. The start timing and the switching timing of the passage by the switching piece 67 are set. Thereby, while the operation mode of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a common mode, in the first high probability state, the game ball is supplied to the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c and the second height is supplied. In the probability state, it is possible to supply game balls to the second derivation area 65d. In the first high probability state, the number of game balls required after the game balls are supplied to the through winning unit 36 to the time when the game balls are supplied to the branch winning device 37 is set to the common number. Game balls are supplied to the downstream side of the region 65c, and in the second high probability state, game balls can be supplied to the second derived region 65d.

  In a configuration in which the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are vertically arranged in the right side area PA3, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are arranged in the third direction. When a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the distribution state, the game ball is supplied to the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34. Thus, by performing a firing operation so that the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls are supplied to the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 in a predetermined order. In addition to this, the game balls can be supplied to the juxtaposition areas of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 in the predetermined order.

  In particular, the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and the first special figure prize winning device 33 existing on the upstream side is in a non-accepting state. The game ball that has flowed into the installation area flows down to the second special figure prize winning device 34. Accordingly, even if the first special map winning device 33 and the second special map winning device 34 are not individually arranged by the first sorting mechanism 71 and the second sorting mechanism 72, respectively, It is possible to supply the game balls to the side in the receiving state of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34.

  When the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 distribute game balls to the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 By the time the game balls are distributed to the through winning section 36, a special number or more of game balls are supplied to the juxtaposition area of the special figure prize devices 33 and 34, and the special figure prize devices 33 and 34 are in a receiving state. In this case, a special number of game balls enter and return to the non-accepting state. Thereby, when the special figure prize winning devices 33, 34 are in the receiving state, the game balls are supplied to the through winning unit 36 after the special figure prize winning devices 33, 34 are in the non-accepting state. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to allow game balls to enter the through winning section 36 in a state where the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepting state.

  The branch winning device 37 is provided vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72. Thus, it becomes possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the branch winning device 37 which is opened when the ball enters the through winning unit 36. Therefore, despite the opening of the branch prize device 37 triggered by the ball entering the through prize portion 36, the movement of the game ball distributed toward the branch prize device 37 by the second distribution mechanism 72. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such an event that the branch winning device 37 is closed before the ball enters the branch winning device 37 due to being disturbed on the way.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the execution mode of the display control of the general-purpose display unit 46 and the execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 are uniquely different between the first high probability state and the second high probability state. However, in the present embodiment, the execution modes are not uniquely different between the first high probability state and the second high probability state. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the ordinary figure change start processing in the present embodiment.

  In steps S1201 to S1205, the same processes as those in steps S401 to S405 of the ordinary figure change start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment are executed.

  This is a case in which a prize has occurred in the through prize unit 36 in a situation where the acceptance control has not been executed for both the first special figure prize device 33 and the second special figure prize device 34 (step S1201: NO). (Step S1202: YES), if it is the first high probability state (Steps S1203 and S1206: YES), the guidance lottery table of the first high probability state is read from the ROM 113 (Step S1207), and the second high probability state is set. In the case of (step S1203: YES, step S1206: NO), the guidance lottery table in the second high probability state is read from the ROM 113 (step S1208). When the process of step S1207 or step S1208 is executed, a guided lottery process is executed (step S1209).

  In the present embodiment, the type of combination of the execution mode of the display control of the general-purpose display unit 46 and the execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch prize device 37 is set to the type that enables the first opportunity detection sensor 66b to win a prize, and The guidance lottery process determines which of the types that can win a prize to the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. In this case, the type of the guidance lottery table referred to in the guidance lottery process is different between the case of the first high probability state and the case of the second high probability state. Specifically, in the guidance lottery table in the first high-probability state, the probability that a combination of the above-described execution modes (hereinafter, also referred to as a first guidance mode) that enables winning to the first opportunity detection sensor 66b is selected. Is set to 80%, the probability of selecting the combination of the above-described execution modes (hereinafter, also referred to as a second guidance mode) that enables winning in the second opportunity detection sensor 66c is increased to 20%. Is set. In the guidance lottery table in the second high probability state, the probability that the first guidance mode is selected is set to 20%, whereas the probability that the second guidance mode is selected is set to 80%. Have been. Thereby, even in the first high probability state, the second special figure prize winning device 34 can be given an opportunity to be in the accepting state, and even in the second high probability state, the first special figure prize winning device 33 can be provided. Can be given an opportunity to be in an acceptance state.

  Further, while the first special figure prize winning device 33 is in the receiving state and the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state in any high probability state as described above, In the first high probability state, the probability that the first special figure prize winning device 33 will be in the accepting state is higher than that of the second special figure prize winning device 34, and in the second high probability state, the second special figure prize winning device 33 has the second special figure prize. The probability that the winning device 34 will be in the receiving state is high. More specifically, the probability that the first special figure prize winning device 33 will be in the accepting state is higher in the first high probability state than in the second high probability state, and the probability that the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the accepting state is the third probability. The second high probability state is higher than the first high probability state. As a result, it is possible to provide a difference between the first high probability state and the second high probability state with respect to the types of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 in which prize opportunities are likely to occur.

  In the guided lottery process, the CPU 114 acquires numerical information of a lottery counter periodically updated in the RAM 114. Then, the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter is compared with the guidance lottery table in the first high probability state and the guidance lottery table in the second high probability state which is being read this time. , One of the first guidance mode and the second guidance mode is selected.

  When the first guidance mode is selected by the guidance lottery process (step S1210: YES), the numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds as the variation display period for the first guidance is set in the general-purpose variation measurement counter of the RAM 114, and The first guidance flag provided in the RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1211). As a result, the change display period of the change display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 and the execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch prize device 37 thereafter are the modes in the case of the first high probability state in the first embodiment. . On the other hand, when the second guidance mode is selected by the guidance lottery process (step S1210: NO), the numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds as the variation display period for the second guidance is set in the general-purpose variation measurement counter of the RAM 114. At the same time, the first guidance flag in the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1212). As a result, the change display period of the change display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 and the subsequent execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch prize device 37 are the modes in the case of the second high probability state in the first embodiment. .

  After executing any of the processes of step S1205, step S1211, and step S1212, the display of the pattern in the general-purpose display unit 46 is started (step S1213). Thereafter, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is incremented by 1 (step S1214). As a result, the execution target of the processing in the normal-figure normal-power control processing (FIG. 19) is the normal-fluctuating processing (step S306).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process during the ordinary figure fluctuation in this embodiment.

  In steps S1301 to S1306, the same processes as those in steps S501 to S506 of the process during normal figure fluctuation (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment are executed.

  If it is the end timing of the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 46 (step S1301: YES), and if any of the high-probability states (step S1303: YES), the first guidance flag of the RAM 114 is set to “ By determining whether or not "1" is set, it is determined whether or not the first guidance mode is selected in the guidance lottery process in the general-purpose change start process (FIG. 27) (step S1307). If "1" is set in the first guidance flag (step S1307: YES), "1" is set in the normal power release time counter of the RAM 114, and the long power release period counter of the RAM 114 is set. Numerical information corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set (step S1308). Thereby, the execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is the mode in the case of the first high probability state in the first embodiment. If "1" is not set in the first guidance flag (step S1307: NO), "2" is set in the normal power release time counter of the RAM 114, and the short open time is stored in the normal power release time counter of the RAM 114. Numerical information corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set (step S1309). Thereby, the execution mode of the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is the mode in the case of the second high probability state in the first embodiment.

  In steps S1310 to S1314, the same processes as those in steps S510 to S514 of the process during normal figure fluctuation (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described above, even in the first high probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the second derivation area 65d, and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state. And even in the second high probability state, the game ball entering the branch winning device 37 flows downstream of the first derivation region 65c and the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state. Can occur. Thereby, in either the first high probability state or the second high probability state, the game ball entering the branch winning device 37 flows into either the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c or the second derivation area 65d. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the game will be performed.

  On the other hand, in the first high-probability state, the probability that the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c is higher than the probability that it flows into the second derivation area 65d, In the high probability state, the probability that the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the second derived region 65d is higher than the probability that the game ball flows downstream of the first derived region 65c. This makes it possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while ensuring that the second high-probability state is more advantageous for the player than the first high-probability state.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the right area PA3 of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the right side area PA3 in the present embodiment in an enlarged manner.

  In the right area PA3, similarly to the first embodiment, a first special figure prize winning device 33, a second special figure prize winning device 34, a through winning unit 36, a branch winning device 37, a first distribution mechanism. 71, a second distribution mechanism 72, a first guide rail 99a, a second guide rail 99b, a third guide rail 99c, and a fourth guide rail 99d. These configurations are the same as in the first embodiment. Further, although their relative positional relationship is the same as that of the first embodiment, the position where they are collectively arranged is a position slightly lower than that of the first embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the special winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA. However, in the present embodiment, the special winning device 35 is provided in a boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3. ing. In this case, even if the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is impossible to win a prize in the special power prize apparatus 35. In order to generate a prize in the special prize apparatus 35, the right area PA3 is required. It is necessary to perform a shooting operation so that a game ball is fired toward.

  The special prize winning device 35 includes a first special figure prize winning device 33, a second special figure prize winning device 34, a through winning portion 36, a branch winning device 37, a first distribution mechanism 71, a second distribution mechanism 72, and each guide rail 99a. ~ 99d will be present on the upstream side. Accordingly, the number of obstacles between the uppermost stream portion of the game area PA and the special prize winning device 35 is reduced, and winning in the special prize winning device 35 is likely to occur.

  The special power prize winning device 35 exists above the first distribution mechanism 71, but between the special power prize winning device 35 and the first distribution mechanism 71, the right area PA 3 without winning the special power prize winning device 35. A guide portion 141 is formed by a large number of nails 24b toward the first distribution mechanism 71 so that the game balls flowing down the first distribution mechanism 71 are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. The game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are supplied to the through prize winning section 36 in accordance with each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, as in the first embodiment. Side, the branch entrance 61 side of the branch winning device 37, and the side of the juxtaposition area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34.

  A special winning portion 142 is provided vertically below the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. The special prize portion 142 is opened vertically upward, and game balls that have won the special prize portion 142 are guided to the rear side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The special prize portion 142 is provided in the form of a gate penetrating in the vertical direction similarly to the through prize portion 36. It is good also as composition which continues flowing down. When one game ball wins in the special winning section 142, nine game balls are paid out.

  Between the special winning section 142 and the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning apparatus 37, game balls distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72 and guided toward the branch entrance 61 by the third guide rail 99c. A special guide rail 143 is provided to surely guide the game balls that have not won the branch winning device 37 to the special winning unit 142. The special guide rail 143 is provided so as to pass in the vertical direction in front of the transparent cover 69 of the branch prize winning device 37, but is formed as transparent as the transparent cover 69. The rolling state of the ball can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the transparent cover 69 and the special guide rail 143.

  In any one of the high-probability states, the first allocating mechanism 71 of the game ball which is supplied to the first allocating mechanism 71 three times later than the game sphere which has won the through prize section 36 but has won the through prize section 36. Alternatively, when the arrival timing at the branch entrance 61 is delayed from the normal due to a delay in firing, or when the game ball reaches the branch entrance 61, the branch prize winning device 37 is already in the closed state, and the branch prize winning device is set. There is a possibility that the winning of the 37 does not occur. In this case, in order to generate a prize in the branch prize device 37, it is necessary to generate a prize in the through prize section 36 again. However, in order to generate a prize in the through prize section 36 again, the first prize is required. It is necessary to supply a plurality of game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71 so that the distribution states of the distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in a state of distributing the game balls to the through winning unit 36. As in the first embodiment, nine game balls are required from the state where the game balls are distributed to the through winning section 36 to the state where the game balls are distributed to the through winning section 36 next time. Therefore, if a prize to the branch prize device 37 is missed as described above, nine game balls are wasted.

  On the other hand, a game ball guided toward the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 but not winning the branch winning device 37 is guided by the special guiding rail 143 to the special winning portion 142 without fail. , And nine special balls are paid out when the special prize part 142 is further won. As a result, even if a prize to the branch prize device 37 is missed as described above, the payout of nine game balls will surely occur as a compensation, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player. Become.

  In the configuration in which the special power winning device 35 is provided at the boundary between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3, a game ball that is fired toward the right area PA3 in the opening / closing execution mode but does not win the special power winning apparatus 35. This is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. In the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode, even if a prize in the through prize unit 36 occurs, a prize in the branch prize device 37 does not substantially occur. In this case, as described above, since the special prize portion 142 is provided, even if the game ball fired toward the right area PA3 in the open / close execution mode does not win the special prize device 35, the first distribution is performed. One game ball out of the nine game balls supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the special winning section 142, and the payout of nine game balls is executed. Thus, even if the game balls fired toward the right area PA3 in the opening / closing execution mode do not win the special power winning device 35, the corresponding game balls can be supplemented.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the right area PA3 of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged right side area PA3 in the present embodiment.

  As in the first embodiment, the right side area PA3 is provided with a second special figure prize winning device 34, a through prize winning portion 36, and a first distribution mechanism 71. These configurations are the same as in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the first special figure winning device 33, the branch winning device 37, and the second distribution mechanism 72 are not provided in the game area PA including the right area PA3. Since the first special figure prize winning device 33 is not provided, the prize winning section which causes the storage of the hold information in the first special figure holding area 133 is provided in the first special figure provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA. Usually, only the winning section 32 is provided (see FIG. 3).

  Further, in response to the fact that the branch winning device 37 is not provided, an opportunity to switch the second special figure winning device 34 from the non-accepting state to the accepting state is generated based on the winning in the through winning unit 36. I have. In this case, the second special figure prize winning device 34 is not immediately switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state when a prize in the through prize unit 36 occurs, but the prize in the through prize unit 36 occurs. , The variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display section 46 is started, and when the variation display of the picture is finished, the second special figure prize winning device 34 is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state.

  Incidentally, in correspondence with the fact that the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the branch prize winning device 37 are not provided, in the present embodiment, only two types of support modes, a high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode, are set. Have been. In the high frequency support mode, when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 46 is performed for 0.8 seconds which is the variation display period for the high support. When the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 46 is completed, the second special figure prize winning device 34 is surely in the receiving state. The receiving state is such that one game ball wins in the second special figure prize winning device 34 and a period longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball after the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters the receiving state. The process is terminated when any one of the conditions that the long acceptance period set as “1.5 seconds” elapses is satisfied.

  In the low frequency support mode, when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46 is performed for 0.4 seconds which is a variation display period for low support. In addition, when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, an accepting lottery process is executed, and in the accepting lottery process, the winning is achieved with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. In the case of the winning, the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters the accepting state at the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the general figure display unit 46 is completed. If 0.1 second, which is a short acceptance period set as a short period, has elapsed, the process ends even if no prize has occurred in the second special figure prize winning device 34.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state is a high probability state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. , And a second low-probability state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In the distribution determination process (step S1105) of the MPU 112 executed when the jackpot is won in the success / failure determination process (step S1103) in the MPU 112, when the result of the high-precision correspondence is obtained, after the opening and closing execution mode ends. When the state becomes the high probability state and the result of the low-probability response is obtained, the state becomes the first low probability state after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high probability state continues until the next jackpot result. The first low-probability state ends when any of the 33, 55, 77, and 110 game times corresponding to the end reference number has been executed without generating a jackpot result, and the second low-probability state. Move to

  Regardless of which of the on-hold information stored in the first special-figure reservation area 133 and the on-hold information stored in the second special-figure reservation area 134 are subjected to the hit determination processing, the probability of obtaining a highly accurate response result is 80. It is constant at%. However, if the high-precision correspondence result is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the number of round games is smaller than the probability of occurrence of the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is eight. Is higher 16 times. On the other hand, if the high-precision correspondence result is triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 133, the round execution number is more than the probability that the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is 16 occurs will occur. The probability of occurrence of the open / close execution mode in which the number of games is eight is higher. Thereby, it is more advantageous for the player when the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 is subjected to the hit determination processing. Incidentally, in the data setting processing (step S1102) of the special figure change start processing (FIG. 27), the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed, so the first special figure holding area 133 and the second special figure holding area If the hold information is stored in both of the 134, the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 is prioritized as a game round start target.

  If the low-precision correspondence result is triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 133, the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is eight occurs, and the reference number of termination is 33 after the open / close execution mode occurs. Transition to a certain first low probability state. On the other hand, when the low-precision response result is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134, after the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is eight occurs, the end reference number is reduced. The state shifts to the first low probability state which is one of 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, and 110 times. In this case, the selectivity of these end reference times is the same at 25%.

  In the high-probability state, when either the high-precision response result or the low-probability response result of eight rounds is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special map holding area 134, which jackpot result in the open / close execution mode is triggered The effect in the display light-emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is executed in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to identify whether or not it is possible to identify. Also, even after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, if the low-probability response result has been triggered, it is difficult or difficult for the player to determine whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode until the high frequency support mode ends. The effect in the display light-emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is executed in a mode where the game cannot be performed. An effect in the display light-emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is executed in such a manner that it is difficult or impossible for the player to determine whether or not the mode is the probability mode. Thereby, while the high-frequency support mode continues during the opening / closing execution mode and after the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to make the player expect the winning / failure lottery mode to be the high probability mode.

  In the first embodiment, the special winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA. However, in the present embodiment, the special winning device 35 is provided in a boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3. ing. In this case, even if the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is impossible to win a prize in the special power prize apparatus 35. In order to generate a prize in the special prize apparatus 35, the right area PA3 is required. It is necessary to perform a shooting operation so that a game ball is fired toward.

  As in the first embodiment, the first distribution mechanism 71 transfers a game ball supplied from above to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71, vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and In addition to the configuration of distributing to one of the right sides of the one distribution mechanism 71, each time one game ball is distributed, the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71 → vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 → In this configuration, the distribution state of the game balls is sequentially changed, for example, rightward of the first distribution mechanism 71 → leftward of the first distribution mechanism 71, and so on.

  Here, how the game ball is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 32A shows a timing at which game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 32B shows a period during which game balls are distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71. FIG. 32 (c) shows a period in which game balls are distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 32 (d) distributes game balls rightward by the first distribution mechanism 71. Indicates the period.

  In the situation where the game balls are stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the operation with the maximum operation amount of the firing operation device 28 is continued, so that the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle. Is done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32A, a fixed interval is set at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t7, the timing of t9, the timing of t11, the timing of t13, and the timing of t15. Thus, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71.

  At each of the timing of t1, the timing of t7, and the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is such that the game balls are distributed to the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and the timing of t2 and the timing of t8. At each of the timings of t14 and t14, as shown in FIG. 32 (b) and FIG. 32 (c), the first distribution mechanism 71 vertically distributes the game ball from the state of distributing the game ball to the left. The state changes to sort.

  At each of the timing of t3, the timing of t9, and the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward. Accordingly, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed vertically downward from the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, the timing of t4, the timing of t10. At each of the timings of t16 and t16, as shown in FIG. 32 (c) and FIG. 32 (d), the first distribution mechanism 71 distributes the game ball vertically downward and distributes the game ball rightward. The state changes to sort.

  At each of the timing of t5 and the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which the game balls are distributed rightward. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and the timing of t6 and the timing of t12. 32 (b) and FIG. 32 (d), the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state in which game balls are distributed to the right to a state in which game balls are distributed to the left. I do.

  As described above, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one for three, and one for three. It is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 at a rate, and is distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a rate of one out of three.

  The first distribution mechanism 71 is provided at a position downstream of the special prize winning device 35 in the right area PA3, and at a position upstream of the second special figure prize winning device 34 and the through winning section 36 in the right area PA3. I have. Between the special prize winning device 35 and the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special prize winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. A guide 151 directed toward the first distribution mechanism 71 is formed by the large number of nails 24b. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. In other words, in the right area PA3, a game ball that flows downstream of the first distribution mechanism 71 is surely supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 before flowing to the downstream side.

  In the right area PA3, a first guide rail 152 for guiding a game ball distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 to a position on the lower left of the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided. Neither the second special figure prize winning device 34 nor the through prize winning portion 36 is provided at the position where the game ball is guided by the first guide rail 152, and the game ball guided by the first guide rail 152 is It will flow down to the lower area PA4 without winning any of the prize sections provided in the right area PA3 including the 2 special figure prize winning device 34 and the through prize section 36.

  In the right area PA3, a second guide rail 153 is provided for guiding a game ball distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 to a position vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71. The second special figure prize winning device 34 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the second guide rail 153, and the game is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the second guide rail 153. If the ball is in a state where the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state, the ball will surely win the second special figure prize winning device 34. As described above, the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters a receiving state triggered by a prize in the through prize winning unit 36. The receiving state ends when one of the game balls wins in the second special figure prize winning device 34 and when the receiving period elapses are satisfied, and returns to the non-receiving state. When one game ball wins in the second special figure prize winning device 34, the payout of three game balls is executed and the second special figure holding area 134, as in the first embodiment. Is stored.

  On the other hand, if the second special map prize winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state, the game balls distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the second guide rail 153 are in the second special map winning configuration. Without winning a prize in the prize winning device 34, the second special figure prize winning device 34 vertically penetrates the passage portion 59 a formed by the cover member 59. A third guide rail 154 is provided to guide a game ball vertically penetrating the passage portion 59a of the second special figure prize winning device 34 further vertically downward. Further, a special winning section 155 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 154.

  The special prize section 155 is opened vertically upward, and the game balls that have won the special prize section 155 are guided to the rear side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special prize portion 155 is provided in the form of a gate penetrating in the vertical direction similarly to the through prize portion 36, and the game ball that has won the special prize portion 155 is directly in the game area PA. It is good also as composition which continues flowing down. When one game ball wins in the special winning section 155, three game balls are paid out. Game balls that are distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the second guide rail 153 but do not win the second special figure prize winning device 34 are specially guided by the third guide rail 154. The winning section 155 is reliably won.

  In the right area PA3, a fourth guide rail 156 for guiding the game balls distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 to a lower right position of the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided. The through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 156, and the game ball distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the fourth guide rail 156 is surely provided. , A prize in the through prize section. As described above, the through winning portion 36 has a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs. Then, the game balls that have passed in the vertical direction through the through holes of the through winning portion 36 are not discharged from the game area PA, but continue flowing down the game area PA. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning section 36 flows vertically downward, it is guided to the second special figure winning apparatus 34 and the special winning section 155 existing to the left of the through winning section 36. Never.

  In a configuration in which game balls are sequentially distributed in three directions by the first distribution mechanism 71, the second special figure prize winning device 34 is provided vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided. Is provided at the lower right position of the game ball, the game balls supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 in the next order of the game balls to be won in the through winning portion 36 are the second game balls. The game ball supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 is guided to the second special figure winning device 34 in the next order without being guided to the special figure winning device 34. As a result, it is possible to secure a long minimum period required for a game ball to be guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34 after a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs. By using the secured period, it is possible to perform the variable display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46. In addition, the processing time is set such that the change display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46 is completed within this secured period and the transition of the second special figure prize device 34 to the acceptance state is completed. Even when a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, a game ball is guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34 after a prize in the through prize unit 36 occurs. By this time, the second special figure prize winning device 34 can be made to be in the receiving state, and the game ball guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34 is surely transferred to the second special figure prize winning device 34. It becomes possible to win a prize.

  The path length dimension of the guide path from the first distribution mechanism 71 to the through winning section 36 by the fourth guidance rail 156 is determined by the guidance from the first distribution mechanism 71 to the second special drawing prize device 34 by the second guidance rail 153. It is set larger than the passage length dimension of the passage. When a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, one game ball is distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and then one game ball is The period required until the distribution is performed by the distribution mechanism 71 to the right is the same or substantially the same as the shortest firing cycle.

  In this configuration, since the path length of the guide path formed by the fourth guide rail 156 is set to be larger than the path length of the guide path formed by the second guide rail 153, the first distribution mechanism 71 distributes the path vertically downward. The time required for the game balls distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 to enter the through-prize unit 36 is longer than the time required for the game balls allocated to the second special figure prize device 34 to win. It is possible to secure a long time. As a result, it is possible to secure a long minimum period required from the occurrence of a prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 in the accepted state to the occurrence of a prize to the through prize unit 36.

  When the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state, the winning prize is invalidated in the through prize winning portion 36. Further, even if a prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure prize winning device 34, the MPU 112 sets the second special figure prize winning device 34 to a non-accepting state thereafter. Must be executed, and the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalidated until the processing is completed. In this case, the shortest period required from the occurrence of the prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 in the accepted state to the occurrence of the prize to the through prize portion 36 is secured long, By the time the game balls supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 arrive at the through-prize unit 36 in the following order of the game balls to be won in the second special figure prize device 34, the second special figure prize device 34 The process of setting the non-acceptance state has been completed, and the transition to the situation where the winning in the through winning unit 36 is valid has been completed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, only two types of the support mode, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, are set. The second special figure prize winning device 34 is surely in the receiving state after the variation display of the picture on the general figure display section 46. Here, the winning mode of the game ball in the high frequency support mode (that is, the high probability state) will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. FIG. 33 (a) shows the timing at which game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, FIG. 33 (b) shows the winning timing to the through winning unit 36, and FIG. FIG. 33 (d) shows a period during which the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in a receiving state, and FIG. 33 (e) shows a winning timing to the second special figure prize winning device 34. Show.

  By continuously operating the firing operation device 28 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game balls can be operated in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). It is supplied to the game area PA. In this case, when the operation amount of the firing operation device 28 by the player is the maximum operation amount, the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right area PA3 has already been described. All are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33A, at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t8, the timing of t10, and the timing of t12, the first distribution mechanism 71 has the shortest firing cycle. Is supplied with a game ball.

  At the timing of t1, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game balls to the through winning unit 36, and therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t1. Wins the through winning section 36 at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. Thus, the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 46 is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. In the high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display period of the pattern on the ordinary figure display unit 46 is constant at 0.8 seconds, which is a time longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball and shorter than twice the shortest firing cycle. I have.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, when the variation display of the pattern is continued on the ordinary figure display unit 46, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the left, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t3 are the second. It is guided to an area different from the area where the special drawing winning device 34 and the special winning section 155 are provided and different from the area where the through winning section 36 is provided. Therefore, the gaming ball flows down toward the lower area PA4 without winning any of the second special figure prize device 34, the through prize unit 36 and the special prize unit 155.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display section 46 is ended as shown in FIG. Since the mode is the high-frequency support mode, the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters the receiving state as shown in FIG. This receiving state is continued until one of the following conditions is satisfied: one game ball wins in the second special figure prize winning device 34; and the long receiving period elapses.

  Thereafter, at the timing t5 when the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state, game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which game balls are guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34, the distribution state is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t5. The game ball wins the second special figure prize winning device 34 at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the processing for returning the second special figure prize winning device 34 to the non-accepting state by the MPU 112 is completed, the second special figure prize winning device 34 is turned off at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. Return to receiving state.

  Thereafter, at the timing t8 when the second special map winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. At the timing of t8, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is the distribution state of guiding the game balls to the through winning unit 36, and therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t8. Wins the through winning section 36 at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 33 (b). If the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the same situation as the timing from t2 to t7 occurs at the timing from t9 to t14.

  With the above configuration, in the high frequency support mode, the game balls to be supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the order of two after the game balls to be won in the through prize portion 36 are in the second order. Even if a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle, a cycle of winning the special figure prize device 34 is performed every three game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. appear. Thereby, it is possible to efficiently generate a prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 in the high frequency support mode.

  Further, when one game ball wins in the second special figure prize winning device 34, three game balls are paid out similarly to the first embodiment. Thus, in the high frequency support mode, in the configuration in which the winning in the second special figure prize winning device 34 occurs surely at a rate of one out of three game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, the second special When a prize occurs in the prize winning device 34, three game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can generate a prize in the second special figure prize winning device 34 without substantially reducing the number of balls held.

  On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, the variable display period of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 is fixed to 0.4 seconds. In addition, when the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 is completed, even if the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters the accepting state, the accepting continuation period of the accepting state is set to 0.1 second. In this configuration, even if a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle, the game supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 two game balls that have won the through prize winning portion 36 later. At the timing when the ball is guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34, the reception control of the second special figure prize winning device 34 has already been completed, and the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, even if the second special figure prize winning device 34 can be in the receiving state, it is substantially impossible to generate a prize in the second special figure prize winning device 34.

  Next, the operation and effect of the provision of the special winning section 155 will be described.

  In any one of the high-frequency support modes, a first allocating mechanism for game balls that is supplied to the first allocating mechanism 71 two times later than game balls that have won the through prize section 36 but have won the through prize section 36 If the timing of reaching the first special figure prize device 34 is later than usual due to a delay in firing or the like, and the game ball reaches the second special figure prize device 34, the second special figure prize device 34 is already in a non-accepting state. There is a possibility that no prize will be generated in the second special figure prize winning device 34. In this case, in order to generate a prize in the second special figure prize device 34, it is necessary to generate a prize in the through prize unit 36 again. To generate a prize in the through prize unit 36 again, It is necessary to further supply game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71 such that the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is such that the game balls are distributed to the through winning unit 36. Since three game balls are required from the state in which the game balls are distributed to the through winning section 36 to the state in which the game balls are distributed to the through winning section 36 next, the second ball is required as described above. If a prize to the special figure prize winning device 34 is missed, three game balls are wasted.

  On the other hand, a game ball guided toward the second special figure prize winning device 34 but not winning the second special figure prize winning device 34 is guided by the third guiding rail 154, so that the special prize winning portion is obtained. If the player wins 155 without fail and further wins the special winning section 155, three game balls are paid out. As a result, even if a prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 is missed as described above, the payout of the three game balls will surely occur as a compensation, so that the disadvantage of the player is suppressed. Becomes possible.

  In the configuration in which the special power winning device 35 is provided at the boundary between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3, a game that is fired toward the right area PA3 in the open / close execution mode but does not win the special power winning apparatus 35. The sphere will be supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. In the open / close execution mode, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, even if a prize in the through prize unit 36 occurs, a prize in the second special figure prize winning device 34 does not substantially occur. . In this case, the special prize section 155 is provided as described above, so that even if the game ball fired toward the right area PA3 in the open / close execution mode does not win the special prize device 35, the first distribution is performed. One of the three game balls supplied to the mechanism 71 wins a special prize unit 155, and the payout of the three game balls is executed. Thus, even if the game balls fired toward the right area PA3 in the opening / closing execution mode do not win the special power winning device 35, the corresponding game balls can be supplemented.

  Next, a processing configuration of the MPU 112 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the general-purpose power control process according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that the general-purpose control process is performed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  First, the information of the general-purpose general-purpose counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S1401), and the general-purpose general-purpose address table stored in the ROM 113 is read (step S1402). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the general public address counter is acquired from the general public address table (step S1403).

  In the general figure control process, the general figure change for monitoring the presence or absence of a prize in the through prize section 36 and for starting the variable display of the picture pattern in the general figure display section 46 in response to the prize in the through prize section 36. A start process (step S1405) and a process during the general figure change for updating the variable display of the picture on the general figure display unit 46 and for starting the acceptance control of the second special figure prize winning device 34 when the variable display period has elapsed. (Step S1406) and processing during ordinary power operation (Step S1407) for executing the acceptance control of the second special figure prize winning device 34 are set. In such a processing configuration, the general-purpose general-purpose counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to know which of the plurality of types of processing is to be executed. A start address of a program for executing the above-described plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general-purpose counter. When the process corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed, the condition of updating the numerical information is satisfied. One is added or “0” is cleared in accordance with the processing executed in the power control processing. Therefore, in the general-purpose general-purpose control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute a process according to the numerical information set in the general-purpose general-purpose counter. Note that “0” is set as an initial value in the general-purpose general-purpose counter.

  After executing the process of step S1403, in step S1404, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S1403 is executed. More specifically, if the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is “0”, the process jumps to the general-purpose variation start process in step S1405, and if the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is “1”, the process proceeds to step S1405. The process jumps to the processing during normal power fluctuation of S1406, and jumps to the processing during normal power operation of step S1407 when the value of the general power general counter is “2”.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the ordinary figure change start processing in the present embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether or not a prize has occurred in the through prize section 36 (step S1501). Here, the MPU 112 executes a monitoring process of whether or not a winning has occurred in the through winning unit 36 in the winning detecting process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). It is executed on condition that the value of the power counter is “0”. Accordingly, in the situation where the picture variation display is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 46 and the situation where the reception control of the second special figure prize winning device 34 is being executed, winning in the through winning unit 36 is invalidated.

  If the winning in the through winning unit 36 has occurred (step S1501: YES), it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode in the RAM 114 is set to “1”. It is determined whether or not the mode is the frequency support mode (step S1502). If the mode is the low frequency support mode (step S1502: YES), an acceptance lottery process is executed (step S1503). In the acceptance lottery process, the current numerical information of the general-purpose telephone random number counter C4 is read into the general-purpose execution area 136. Then, by referring to the receiving lottery table read from the ROM 113, it is determined whether the numerical information read into the general-purpose execution area 136 is numerical information corresponding to the receiving winning, and the result of the determination is stored in the RAM 114. To memorize. Thereafter, numerical information corresponding to 0.4 seconds as a low support variable display period is set in a general-purpose variable measurement counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S1504). On the other hand, in the case of the high frequency support mode (step S1502: YES), numerical information corresponding to 0.8 seconds as the high support variable display period is set in the ordinary figure fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114 (step S1505). ). Every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed, the value set in the normal figure fluctuation measurement counter is decremented by one. Then, when the value of the general-purpose variation measurement counter becomes “0” from a state of 1 or more, the MPU 112 specifies that it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46.

  After the execution of any of the processes in step S1504 and step S1505, the display of the variation of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 46 is started (step S1506). In this case, the form of the pattern displayed on the general-purpose display unit 46 at the start timing of the variable display of the pattern is the same regardless of whether the processing in step S1504 or step S1505 is executed. In this way, in any situation, it is possible to start the variable display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 46 in the same manner, and thus it is possible to reduce the processing load. In addition, before the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display section 46 is started, the state in which the display of the pattern finally stopped and displayed in the previous variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display section 46 is continued. Has become. Thereafter, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is incremented by 1 (step S1507). As a result, the execution target of the process in the normal-figure normal-power control process (FIG. 34) is the normal-fluctuating process (step S1406).

  FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the process during ordinary figure fluctuation in this embodiment.

  In the general-floor fluctuation processing, if the value of the general-figure fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114 is 1 or more (step S1601: NO), it means that it is not the end timing of the graphic fluctuation display on the general-figure display unit 46. Therefore, the display content is updated (step S1602). In the update process of the display content, the pattern to be displayed on the general-purpose display unit 46 is updated to the next pattern in order to update the display content of the general-purpose display unit 46. In this case, the pattern update mode is constant irrespective of the low-probability state and the high-probability state, and the pattern is updated irrespective of whether or not the winning lottery process has resulted in the acceptance winning in the low-probability state. Is constant. In this way, in any situation, it is possible to update the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46 in the same manner, and thus it is possible to reduce the processing load.

  If it is the end timing of the variation display of the picture on the general-figure display unit 46 (step S1601: YES), if it is the low-frequency support mode (step S1603: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503 in the general-figure variation start process (FIG. 35). It is determined whether or not the winning has been determined in the receiving lottery process (step S1604). If the winning has not been won (step S1604: NO), the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter in the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1605). As a result, the execution target of the process in the general-purpose normal-power control process (FIG. 34) is the general-purpose change start process (step S1405).

  If the mode is the low frequency support mode (step S1603: NO) and the reception has been won (step S1604: YES), the normal power release period counter provided in the RAM 114 corresponds to the short reception period of 0.1 second. Numerical information to be set is set (step S1606). On the other hand, when the timing is the end timing of the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46 (step S1601: YES), and when the high frequency support mode is set (step S1603: YES), Numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds which is a long acceptance period is set (step S1607). The normal power open period counter is a counter for specifying the maximum remaining time until the second special figure prize winning device 34 is set in the non-accepting state by the MPU 112 when the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state. It is. The value set in the ordinary power release period counter is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the ordinary power release period counter changes from “1” or more to “0”, it is determined that the timing of ending the current open cycle in the second special figure prize winning device 34 is identified.

  If any of the processes of step S1606 and step S1607 has been executed, the reception start process of the second special figure prize winning device 34 is executed (step S1608). In the reception start processing, the output of the drive signal to the second special figure prize driving unit 56b is started. As a result, the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters a receiving state. Thereafter, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter in the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1609). As a result, the execution target of the process in the normal power control process (FIG. 34) is the normal power operation process (step S1407).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing processing during a normal power operation in the present embodiment.

  By determining whether or not a game ball has been detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure prize device 34, it is determined whether or not a prize has occurred in the second special figure prize device 34 (step S1701). . If no prize has occurred in the second special figure prize winning device 34 (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary power open period counter of the RAM 114 is “0” to determine the second special figure prize. It is determined whether or not the acceptance period of the award winning device 34 has elapsed (step S1702).

  If a prize has occurred in the second special figure prize device 34 (step S1701: YES), or if the acceptance period of the second special figure prize device 34 has elapsed (step S1702: YES), the second special figure prize device 34 The reception ending process of the diagram winning device 34 is executed (step S1703). In the acceptance ending process, the output of the driving signal to the second special figure prize driving unit 56b is stopped. As a result, the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters a non-accepting state. After that, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter in the RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1704). As a result, the execution target of the process in the general-purpose normal-power control process (FIG. 34) is the general-purpose change start process (step S1405).

  FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 112. The game state transition processing is executed in the special power ending processing of step S1012 in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 26).

  If the jackpot result that triggered this opening / closing execution mode is a highly accurate response result (step S1801: YES), “1” is set to the high probability flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S1802), and the RAM 114 Is set to the first high frequency support flag provided in (1) (step S1803). The high-probability flag is a flag for specifying whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 112, and the first high-frequency support flag is a high-frequency support that continues until the support mode becomes the next jackpot result. This flag is used by the MPU 112 to specify whether or not the mode is set. By setting “1” to both the high probability flag and the first high frequency support flag, the gaming state becomes the high probability state.

  If the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a low-probability response result (step S1801: NO), the high probability flag in the RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1804) and provided in the RAM 114. The second high frequency support flag is set to "1" (step S1805). The second high-frequency support flag is a flag for specifying by the MPU 112 whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode that is continued until the end reference number of games has been exhausted. When the value of the high probability flag is cleared to "0" and the second high frequency support flag is set to "1", the gaming state becomes the first low probability state. Thereafter, the high frequency execution counter is set (step S1806). In the set processing, the value corresponding to the type of the low-probability response result that triggered the current open / close execution mode among the 33, 55, 77, and 110 times is stored in the high-frequency execution counter provided in the RAM 114. set. The high frequency execution counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of games in which the high frequency support mode is to be continued by the MPU 112. The value set in the high frequency execution counter is decremented by 1 every time the game is executed, and when the value of the high frequency execution counter becomes “0”, the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Changes to

  If the processing of step S1803 or step S1806 has been executed, the ending command transmission processing is executed (step S1807). In the ending command transmission process, if the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a low-probability response result, the ending command in which information on the reference frequency of ending the high-frequency support mode is set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121. If the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a highly accurate response result, the ending command in which the corresponding information is set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121.

  FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing a display continuation period acquisition process executed by the MPU 112. The display continuation period acquisition process is executed in step S1109 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 27).

  In the case where the current game time is the high frequency support mode, the hold information in the second special figure holding area 134 is the start target of the game time, and the result of the hit / fail determination processing is not a jackpot result (steps S1901 and S1902: (YES, step S1903: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 (step S1904). When the hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 (step S1904: YES), the second special figure holding area 134 is stored in a state where another hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. Means that the current game round has been started with the hold information stored in the game. In this case, information corresponding to a fixed short period of 1.2 seconds is read from the ROM 113 as information of the display duration of the current game, and the read fixed short period information is set in the special figure special power timer counter of the RAM 114. (Step S1905). Thus, in the current game time, the variation display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 45b is performed for a fixed short period, and the effect for the game time in the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. For a fixed short period.

  On the other hand, when the hold information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134 (step S1904: NO), the second special figure holding is performed in a state where another hold information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134. This means that the current game round has started with the hold information stored in the area 134 as an opportunity. In this case, information corresponding to a fixed long period of 7.2 seconds is read from the ROM 113 as information on the display duration of the current game, and the read fixed long period information is set in the special figure special power timer counter of the RAM 114. (Step S1906). Thus, in the current game time, the variation display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 45b is performed for a fixed long period, and the effect for the game time in the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. For a fixed period of time.

  That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the game time is executed triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134, and when the result of the game time determination processing is not a jackpot result, The display duration of the game times is a fixed short period if another hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, and since no other hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. If there is a fixed long term. Thus, in the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to simplify the execution mode of each game time in a situation where the game time resulting from the departure is executed with the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 as an opportunity. .

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, two or more predetermined numbers of game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). Wins to the second special figure prize winning device 34 occur at a rate of one (specifically, three). In this case, if the second special figure display section 45b executes a game round for which the second special figure display unit 45b is to be changed and displayed in a state where another reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, the display continuation period is set. This is a fixed short period, which is a period shorter than “shortest firing cycle × predetermined number”. In this way, when the game times resulting from the departure continue in the situation where the hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the maximum number of pieces of hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. In this state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a new prize is generated in the second special figure prize winning device 34 from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the event that the hold information is not acquired despite the winning of the second special figure winning device 34.

  When the second special figure display unit 45b performs a game round in which the second special figure display unit 45b is in the variable display mode in a state where another reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, the display continuation period is set to “shortest”. Is greater than or equal to “the launch cycle × predetermined number × the maximum number of reservations of the second special figure reservation area 134” and less than “the shortest launch cycle × the predetermined number × (the maximum number of reservations of the second special figure reservation area 134 + 1)”. Fixed long term. Accordingly, when the game round resulting from the departure is executed in a state where the hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the maximum hold is performed in the second special figure hold area 134 during the execution of the game round. The number of pieces of hold information is stored, and the second special figure prize winning device 34 is stored in the state where the maximum number of pieces of hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134 during the execution of the game. It is possible to prevent a situation where a new prize is generated from occurring.

  In the display continuation period acquisition process, when the low frequency support mode is set (step S1901: NO), when the first special figure display unit 45a is a game time to be a variable display target (step S1902: NO), or If the game time is a game time corresponding to the jackpot result (step S1903: YES), a process of setting a corresponding display continuation period is executed (step S1907). In the set processing, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the current change start correspond to the jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. In addition, if neither the jackpot result nor the numerical information obtained from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the special figure execution area 135 is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, the reach display is generated. judge. If it is determined that the reach display will occur, the display duration period corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 113. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113. I do. Incidentally, the display continuation period that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display continuation period that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display continuation table. After that, the obtained information of the display continuation period is set in the special figure special power timer counter of the RAM 114. Thus, in the high frequency support mode, in a situation other than a situation in which a game round resulting from a departure is executed with the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 as an opportunity, the execution mode of the game round can be diversified. It becomes possible.

  Next, the effect determination processing executed by the MPU 123 of the audio light emission control device 121 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The effect determination process is repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 milliseconds.

  When the MPU 123 of the audio light emission control device 121 has received the ending command from the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 (step S2001: YES), the high frequency support mode after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode continues from the ending command. The number of different game times is grasped (step S2002). As described above, when the first low probability state is set after the open / close execution mode, the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is one of 33, 55, 77, and 110, and the high probability state is set after the open / close execution mode. , The high frequency support mode continues indefinitely until the next jackpot result occurs. Therefore, in step S2002, which of the five types of continuation times is determined from the ending command, the information of the determined continuation times is provided in the RAM 125 of the sound emission control device 121 as information of the actual continuation times. Set to the actual continuation number counter.

  Thereafter, the information of the initial display continuation number is read out from the ROM 124 of the audio light emission control device 121, and the information of the initial display continuation number is set in a display counter provided in the RAM 125 (step S2003). The displayed counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode displayed on the symbol display device 41 by the MPU 123. Also, the initial display continuation number is set to 11 times, which is smaller than any actual continuation number that can be grasped in step S2002. Thereafter, the number of undisplayed continuations is calculated by subtracting the number of initial display continuations read out in step S2003 from the number of actual continuations obtained in step S2002. It is set in a continuation number counter (step S2004). If the actual continuation count is infinite, information corresponding to infinity is set in the undisplayed continuation count counter.

  Thereafter, an initial display command is transmitted to the display control device 126 (Step S2005). In the initial display command, information on the number of continuous initial display read out in step S2003 is set. When the display control device 126 receives the initial display command, the display control device 126 causes the symbol display device 41 to start displaying a moving image corresponding to the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, and as an image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode. The image of the initial display continuation number is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The image of the continuation number of the high-frequency support mode is continuously displayed on the symbol display device 41 even in the situation where the effect for the game round is executed after the ending period ends. In addition, each time an effect for the game is started, the image is updated so that the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is decremented by one, and the number of continuations described below is updated. When the value addition condition is satisfied, the image is updated so that a value corresponding to the satisfaction of the addition condition is added. The image display of the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41 ends when the high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is set, or when a big hit result occurs and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  In the effect determination process, when a variation command and a type command are received as game start commands from the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 (step S2006: YES), the game start process is executed (step S2007). In the effect determination processing, other processing is executed (step S2008). In other processes, when a command other than the ending command and the game start command is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is executed.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the game start processing executed in step S2007 of the effect determination processing (FIG. 39).

  First, since the case where the command for starting the game has been received means that a new game has been started, the value of the display counter of the RAM 125 is decremented by 1 (step S2101). If the value of the currently displayed counter is already “0”, that state is maintained. Further, even if the information of the counter being displayed is information corresponding to infinity, the state is maintained. The case where the information of the displayed counter is information corresponding to infinity corresponds to the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 in the high probability state, where the high frequency support mode continues until the next big hit result. This corresponds to a situation where an image indicating that the operation is performed is displayed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the undisplayed continuation number counter of the RAM 125 is 1 or more and the value of the currently displayed counter of the RAM 125 is “0” (step S2102). When the value of the undisplayed continuation number counter of the RAM 125 is 1 or more and the value of the currently displayed counter of the RAM 125 is “0” (step S2102: YES), even though the high-frequency support mode continues. This means that the remaining continuation number of the high frequency support mode displayed on the symbol display device 41 is zero. Therefore, by setting “1” to the addition display flag provided in the RAM 125, the MPU 123 can specify that the addition and display of the continuation number need to be performed (step S2103).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, or if the process in step S2103 is performed, it is determined whether the information on the display continuation period set in the change command is a fixed long period (step S2104). If it is a fixed long period (step S2104: YES), the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 is provided on condition that “1” is set to the addition display flag (step S2105: YES). Is executed.

  Specifically, first, a process of grasping the number of continuations of addition display is executed (step S2106). In the process of ascertaining the number of continuations of added display, if the value of the number of undisplayed continuations is less than 11, the number of undisplayed continuations is grasped as the number of added display continuations. When the value of the number of undisplayed continuations is not infinite and is 11 or more, the number of times of undisplayed continuation is grasped as 11 times. Further, if the value of the number of undisplayed continuations is infinite, if the number of game executions performed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is less than 100, 11 times is grasped as the added display continuation number, and if it is 100 or more. For example, the information corresponding to infinity is grasped as the addition display continuation number. Then, the information on the number of times of additional display continuation that is grasped is set in the display counter of the RAM 125 (Step S2107), and the value of the counter of the number of undisplayed continuations in the RAM 125 is subtracted by the value of the number of additional display continuations (Step S2108). If the information of the undisplayed continuation number counter is information that already corresponds to infinity, the state where the information corresponding to infinity is set is maintained regardless of the information of the added display continuation number.

  After that, an addition display corresponding process is executed (step S2109). In the addition display processing, a table for effect control corresponding to execution of addition display for a fixed long period is read from the ROM 124. By controlling the display light-emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b in accordance with the effect control table, an effect corresponding to the execution of the addition display is performed by the display light-emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b in the game play for a fixed long period. Is done. In addition, a command in which information indicating that the current round of game corresponds to a departure result and information of the number of times of continuation of added display for a fixed long period are transmitted to the display control device 126. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the content specified by the command. Thereby, the effect for the game round corresponding to the departure result is executed on the symbol display device 41 for a fixed long period, and is displayed as an image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41. The value becomes the value of the current addition display count. In this case, when the addition display continuation number is information corresponding to infinity, an image corresponding to infinity indicating that the high frequency support mode is continued until the next jackpot result is used as the image of the continuation number of the high frequency support mode. Is displayed.

  If the information of the display continuation period set in the fluctuation command is a fixed long period and “1” is not set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125 (step S2104: YES, step S2105: NO) A highlighting corresponding process is executed (step S2110). In the highlighting support processing, an effect corresponding to execution of highlighting for emphasizing that the current state is the high frequency support mode and for highlighting an image displayed as the number of times the high frequency support mode is continued in the symbol display device 41. The control table is read from the ROM 124. By controlling the display light-emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b in accordance with the effect control table, an effect corresponding to the execution of the highlighted display is executed by the display light-emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b in the game play for a fixed long period. Is done. In addition, a command in which information indicating that the current game round corresponds to the out-of-game result for a fixed long period and a command in which execution information of highlighting is set is transmitted to the display control device 126. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the content specified by the command. As a result, the effect for the game round corresponding to the departure result is executed on the symbol display device 41 for a fixed long period, and it is emphasized that the current state is the high frequency support mode. The effect for emphasizing the image displayed as the continuation number of the frequency support mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  If the information on the display continuation period set in the change command is fixed short-term information (step S2111: YES), a short-term corresponding process is executed (step S2112). In the short-term correspondence processing, a table for effect control corresponding to a fixed short term is read from the ROM 124. There is only one type of effect control table stored in the ROM 124 for a fixed short period of time. The display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b are controlled according to the effect control table, so that the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b execute a game effect corresponding to a fixed short time.

  In the short-term correspondence processing, a short-term correspondence command is transmitted to the display control device 126. When the display control device 126 receives the short-term corresponding command, the display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the effect for the game corresponding to the fixed short period is executed. In the effect for the game round corresponding to the fixed short period, the high-speed fluctuation of the symbols is started in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the final stop period (0.2 seconds) is subtracted from the fixed short period (1.2 seconds). In the state where the symbol combination corresponding to the departure result is stopped and displayed at the timing when the elapsed period has elapsed, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is simultaneously stopped. Then, the state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the departure result is stopped and displayed is maintained over the final stop period. Thereby, even if the effect for the game round ends in a fixed short period, it is possible to clearly indicate from the symbol display device 41 that the result of the game round is a result of the miss. In addition, the combination of the symbols displayed as the final stop in the game effect corresponding to the fixed short period may be always the same, or may be changed by being determined by lottery or the like.

  In addition, in the short-term correspondence processing, when “1” is set to the addition display flag of the RAM 125, the display-in-progress counter of the RAM 125 is incremented by one and the value of the non-display continuation counter of the RAM 125 is decremented by one. Then, information indicating that the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 should be added by 1 is set in the short-term corresponding command. When the display control device 126 receives the short-term corresponding command, the display control device 126 not only performs the above-described effect for the game round, but also displays the image of the continuation number of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41. The displayed value is incremented by one.

  If the information of the display continuation period set in the change command is neither the fixed long period nor the fixed short period (step S2104 and step S2111: NO), the command transmission process is executed (step S2113). In the command transmission process, a lottery process is performed for determining whether or not to perform the advance notice display and the content of the execution based on the contents of the variation command and the type command. Then, an effect control table corresponding to the game duration of the current game time, the game result of the current game time, and the result of the lottery process of the notice display is read from the ROM 124. By controlling the display light-emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b in accordance with the effect control table, the effect for the current game is executed by the display light-emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b. In addition, a non-fixed command in which information corresponding to the game duration of the current game time, the game result of the current game time, and the result of the lottery process of the notice display is set is transmitted to the display control device 126. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the contents specified by the non-fixed command. Thereby, the effect for the current round of the game is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  In the command transmission process, when “1” is set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125, the display-in-progress counter of the RAM 125 is incremented by one, and the value of the non-display continuation counter of the RAM 125 is decremented by one. Then, information indicating that the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 should be added by 1 is set in the non-fixed command. When the display control device 126 receives the non-fixed command, the display control device 126 not only performs the above-described effect for the game round but also displays the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41. Value is incremented by one.

  Next, in the case where the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the high frequency support mode, and the game times corresponding to the missed result are continuous, the flow of the game is shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to a time chart. FIG. 41 (a) shows the timing of winning a prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34, and FIG. 41 (b) shows a state where the number of the reservation information stored in the second special figure prize holding area 134 increases and decreases. 41 (c) shows the execution period of the game effect.

  At the timing of t1, the opening / closing execution mode ends and the effect for the game round can be started in the high frequency support mode. In this case, before the opening / closing execution mode is started, the holding status of the upper limit holding number is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, and therefore, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. In the second special figure holding area 134, four pieces of holding information which is the upper limit holding number is stored. Therefore, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the effect for the game round is started triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134. Since the game time is a game time corresponding to an off result started in a situation where the hold information is separately stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the display time of the game time is a fixed short period 1 .2 seconds.

  Here, at the timing of t1, the launch of the game ball toward the right area PA3 with the shortest launch cycle is started. As described above, when the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the high frequency support mode, the ratio is one for two or more predetermined numbers (specifically, three). The game balls having the same firing order among the predetermined number of game balls win the second special figure prize winning device 34. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41A, the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t8, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, the timing of t15, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, the timing of t20, and the timing of t21 At each of the timing, the timing of t23, and the timing of t26, a prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 is periodically generated. In this case, the cycle in which a prize is generated in the second special figure prize winning device 34 is “the shortest firing cycle × the predetermined number”. Specifically, it is 1.8 seconds.

  On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, in a situation in which another hold information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134, in the game times in which the second special figure display unit 45b is a variable display target, as described above. The display continuation period is 1.2 seconds, which is a fixed short period shorter than “shortest firing period × predetermined number”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t4, the timing of t6, the timing of t7, the timing of t9, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t14 and the timing of t16 As described above, game times in which the display continuation period is a fixed short period are periodically executed. Since the fixed short period is shorter than the cycle in which a prize is generated in the second special figure prize winning device 34, at the timing of t17, which is the timing when ten game rounds have been executed from the timing of t1, FIG. As shown in (b) and FIG. 41 (c), in the situation where only one piece of hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, it is the timing to start the game round triggered by the hold information. In this case, since the second special figure display unit 45b is a target for starting the fluctuation in a situation where another reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, the display time is a fixed long period. .

  In the situation where the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the high frequency support mode during the fixed long period, the second special feature is provided at a ratio of one to a predetermined number (specifically, three). In the configuration in which a prize is generated in the figure winning device 34, the minimum firing period × the predetermined number × the maximum holding number of the second special figure holding area 134 is equal to or more than “the shortest firing period × the predetermined number × (second It is set to 7.2 seconds, which is less than the “maximum number of holdings in the special figure holding area 134 + 1)”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (a) and FIG. 41 (c), the timing of t18, the timing of t19, the timing of t20, and the timing of t21, which are situations in which the game round is executed for a fixed long period, respectively. When a prize is generated in the second special figure prize winning device 34, the hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134, and the upper limit hold number of hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134 at time t21. State.

  Here, if the addition display condition is satisfied in the number of games having a fixed long period, the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41 is set to “11”. Is done. In this case, when the first low probability state is set after the end of the open / close execution mode, the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is any one of 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, and 110 times, all of which are “11”. It is a multiple. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the value initially displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41 is “11”, and the value is displayed each time the game is newly started. Since the present value is decremented by one, when the eleventh game time is started, the display of the value becomes “0”. In addition, in the case where the firing operation is continued in a mode in which the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle and each game time is deviated, each time 10 game times are executed, A game time for a fixed long period is executed. Then, if the display of the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is “0” in the game time that is a fixed long term, and if the high frequency support mode continues thereafter, it is displayed as the image. The value is basically “11”. This makes it possible to cause a situation in which the display in the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is added each time the game time of a fixed long period is executed, and over a period longer than the fixed short period. It is possible to execute an effect in which the addition display is performed, as an effect for a continuous game round.

  Thereafter, after the timing of t22, a state is reached in which a game round is started with the second special-figure display area 45b as a variation start target in a state where one piece of reservation information is stored in the second special-figure reservation area 134. Up to this point, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the game times in a fixed short period are repeatedly executed (timing at t22, timing at t24, timing at t25, and timing at t27). Even in this situation, as described above, since the fixed short period is shorter than the cycle in which a prize is generated in the second special figure prize winning device 34, the fixed short period is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 as shown in FIG. The number of pending information is gradually decreasing. Then, at the timing at which the game times in the fixed short period are performed 11 times from the timing of t22, only one piece of hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, similarly to the timing of t17. In this situation, the timing for starting the game round triggered by the hold information is reached, and the game round for a fixed long period is started.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the configuration in which the second special figure prize winning device 34 and the through prize winning section 36 are provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA, a position upstream of the second special figure prize winning apparatus 34 and the through prize winning section 36 in the right area PA3. A first distribution mechanism 71 that sequentially changes the distribution direction when a game ball is supplied is provided. When a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in a state where the first distribution mechanism 71 is in the first distribution state, a game ball is supplied to the through winning unit 36, and the first When a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in a state where the distribution mechanism 71 is in the second distribution state, the game ball is supplied to the second special figure prize winning device 34. Thereby, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls can be supplied toward the through-winning portion 36, and the second special map can be provided. It is possible to supply game balls to the winning device 34. Also, by appropriately designing the configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71, the frequency at which game balls are supplied to the through winning unit 36 and the frequency at which game balls are supplied to the second special figure prize device 34 are determined. Each can be set to a frequency desired by the designer. Furthermore, it becomes possible to supply the game ball to the second special figure prize winning device 34 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball was supplied to the through prize portion 36. When the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state based on the ball having entered, the game ball is reliably supplied to the second special figure prize winning device 34 in the receiving state. Becomes possible.

  When three specific game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one round. Thus, by supplying the game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls can be repeatedly distributed in a certain mode.

  Only the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 can enter the second special figure prize winning device 34 and the through winning unit 36. This makes it easy to design the frequency of the ball entering the second special figure prize winning device 34 and the through prize winning portion 36 to a desired frequency.

  The game balls to be supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the two game balls distributed to the through winning unit 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the second special figure prize winning device 34. As a result, it is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36 to when the game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. Therefore, when the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters the receiving state based on the game ball entering the through prize winning portion 36, the game ball enters the second special figure prize winning device 34 in the receiving state. In a case where the supply is ensured, it is possible to secure a period until the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters the receiving state when the game ball enters the through prize winning section 36.

  Before the first distribution mechanism 71 distributes the game balls toward the through winning unit 36 from the state of distributing the game balls to the second special figure prize winning device 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 has a distribution direction different from these distribution directions. It is in a state of distributing the game ball to. As a result, using the period in which the game balls are distributed to a side different from the second special figure prize winning device 34 and the through prize section 36, the game ball enters the through prize section 36 and then the second special figure. It is possible to secure a somewhat long period until the game balls are supplied to the winning device 34.

  The variation display of the pattern is executed on the general figure display unit 46 based on the game ball having entered the through winning unit 36, and when the variation display of the pattern ends, the second special figure prize winning device 34 is set to the receiving state. Become. In this configuration, a certain period from when the game ball enters the through winning portion 36 to when the game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 is secured to some extent, as described above, so that the through winning portion 36 is provided. When the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters the receiving state based on the game ball having entered the game ball, the game ball is reliably supplied to the second special figure prize winning device 34 in the receiving state. In this case, it is possible to secure a period during which the variable display of the design is executed on the general-purpose display unit 46 before the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters the receiving state.

  In the high-frequency support mode, when a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the game ball is supplied to the through winning unit 36 and then the game ball is supplied to the second special figure prize device 34. The variation display of the pattern is performed on the general-purpose display unit 46 for a specific period equal to or less than the period required until is supplied. Accordingly, in a situation where the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the high frequency support mode, the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 enter the through winning section 36. When the ball is hit, the second special figure prize device 34 receives the game ball which is distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 to the second special figure prize device 34 before reaching the second special figure prize device 34. It becomes possible to be in a state.

  On the other hand, in the low probability state, when the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters the acceptance state based on the game ball having entered the through prize winning portion 36, the game is transmitted to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle. Even if the ball is supplied, the reception control of the second special figure prize device 34 has already been completed at the timing when the game ball is supplied to the second special figure prize device 34, and the second special figure prize device 34 is not accepted. It is in a state. As a result, in the low probability state, even if the second special figure prize winning device 34 can be in the receiving state, it is substantially impossible for game balls to enter the second special figure prize winning device 34. Therefore, the advantage of the high frequency support mode can be enhanced.

  When the first distribution mechanism 71 distributes game balls to the second special figure prize winning device 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 is supplied after one game ball is supplied to the second special figure prize winning device 34. Is set to a state where game balls are distributed to the through winning unit 36, and the second special figure prize winning device 34 returns to the non-accepted state by entering one game ball when it is in the accepted state. Thereby, when the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state, the game balls can be supplied to the through winning unit 36 after the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible for the second special figure prize winning device 34 to enter a game ball in the through prize winning portion 36 in a non-accepting state. Further, it is possible to prevent a useless game ball from being generated after the game ball is supplied to the second special figure prize winning device 34 until the game ball is supplied to the through winning unit 36.

  The path length of the fourth guide rail 156 that guides the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 to the through winning section 36 is changed to the game ball distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 by the second special figure prize winning device. The length of the passage is set to be larger than the length of the passage of the second guide rail 153 that guides the guide rail 34. Accordingly, the period required for the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 to reach the position where the game balls can enter the through winning unit 36 is set to the time required for the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 It is possible to make the time longer than it takes to reach a position where the ball can enter the special figure prize winning device 34. Therefore, when the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the accepting state, the through winning prize unit is set after the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state based on the ball entering the second special figure prize winning device 34. It is possible to supply game balls to 36, and it is possible to generate a ball in the through winning unit 36 in a situation where the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-described operation and effect only by adjusting the passage length of the second guide rail 153 and the fourth guide rail 156.

  The second special figure prize winning device 34 is provided at a position vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71. Thus, it becomes possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the second special figure prize winning device 34, which is in the receiving state when the ball enters the through winning unit 36. Therefore, even though the second special map prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state triggered by the ball entering the through prize winning portion 36, the second special map prize device 34 is sorted toward the second special map prize winning device 34 by the first sorting mechanism 71. The occurrence of such an event that the movement of the game ball is disturbed on the way and the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state before the ball enters the second special figure prize winning device 34 is prevented. It becomes possible.

  In the high-frequency support mode, in a situation where a plurality of pieces of hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as second hold information) are stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the second hold information corresponding to the departure result is used as an opportunity to execute the game. Is executed, the game times are executed in a fixed short period shorter than the shortest ball entry period when the game balls enter the second special figure prize winning device 34. Thus, even though the upper limit number of the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, there is a possibility that a game ball will newly enter the second special figure prize winning device 34. Is reduced. Therefore, an event that the second hold information is not acquired even though a game ball has entered the second special figure prize winning device 34 is less likely to occur. On the other hand, when the game time is executed in response to the execution of the second hold information in a situation where another second hold information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the game time is set to the shortest entry time. It is executed over a fixed long period of time equal to or more than the product of the ball cycle and the upper limit number. Thereby, in a case where the second special information reservation area 134 does not store the second special information, the upper limit number of the second special information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134. This makes it possible to cause a situation in which the upper limit number of the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134.

  There is only one fixed short period. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the ROM 113 for storing information on the fluctuation display period of the game times. Similarly, there is only one fixed long term. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the ROM 113 for storing information on the fluctuation display period of the game times.

  The fixed long period is a period that is equal to or longer than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the upper limit number, and less than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number. Thus, when the game round is executed for a fixed long period, the upper limit number of the second hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 in a situation where the game round is being executed. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls larger than the upper limit from entering the second special figure prize device 34 in the situation where the game times are being executed. Become.

  In the high frequency support mode, when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle and the game cycle triggered by the execution of the second hold information corresponding to the departure result is repeatedly executed, the game is fixed. A situation occurs in which the game times for a fixed period are executed once after the game times for a short period are executed 10 times. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game times is increased in order to prevent a situation in which the second suspension information is not acquired despite the occurrence of a ball entering the second special figure prize winning device 34, It is possible to periodically generate a situation in which the round is executed for a relatively long period of time, and accordingly, it is possible to make the effect execution mode preferable.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the right area PA3 of the game area PA is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 42 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the right side area PA3 in the present embodiment in an enlarged manner.

  As in the fourth embodiment, the right side area PA3 is provided with a second special figure prize device 34, a special power prize device 35, a through prize portion 36, and a special prize portion 155. The special electric winning device 35 is provided at the boundary between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3 as in the fourth embodiment. In the right area PA3, a third distribution mechanism 161 and a fourth distribution mechanism 162 are provided at a position downstream of the special power winning device 35.

  Each of the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 moves the game ball supplied from above to one of the left side of the distribution mechanisms 161 and 162 and the vertically lower side of the distribution mechanisms 161 and 162. Each time one game ball is distributed, the distribution mechanism is arranged to the left of the distribution mechanisms 161 and 162 → vertically below the distribution mechanisms 161 and 162 → to the left of the distribution mechanisms 161 and 162 → And the like, the distribution state of the game balls is sequentially changed. In this case, the game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 are distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 at a ratio of one to two, and the third distribution is performed at a ratio of one to two. It is distributed vertically below the mechanism 161. The game balls supplied to the fourth distribution mechanism 162 are distributed to the left of the fourth distribution mechanism 162 at a ratio of one to two, and the game balls supplied to the fourth distribution mechanism 162 at a ratio of one to two. 162 vertically below.

  The third distribution mechanism 161 is located downstream of the special electric prize winning device 35 in the right area PA3, and the second special figure prize winning device 34, the through prize winning section 36, the special prize winning section 155, and the fourth prize are located in the right area PA3. It is provided at a position upstream of the minute mechanism 162. Between the special prize winning device 35 and the third distribution mechanism 161, game balls flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special prize winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161. A guide part 163 directed to the third distribution mechanism 161 is formed by a large number of nails 24b. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special electric winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161. In other words, in the right area PA3, the game ball that flows downstream of the third sorting mechanism 161 is reliably supplied to the third sorting mechanism 161 before flowing into the downstream side.

  In the right area PA3, a fifth guide rail 164 for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 to a position on the lower left of the third distribution mechanism 161 is provided. A fourth distribution mechanism 162 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the fifth guide rail 164, and is distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 and guided by the fifth guide rail 164. Is reliably supplied to the fourth distribution mechanism 162. The fifth guide rail 164 is provided so that game balls distributed vertically below the third distribution mechanism 161 do not win the fourth distribution mechanism 162. Further, the game balls distributed vertically below the third distribution mechanism 161 are moved by a seventh guide rail 166 and an eighth guide rail 167, which will be described later, to a second special figure prize winning device 34, a through prize prize part 36, and a special prize prize part 155. Winning will be blocked.

  In the right area PA3, a sixth guide rail 165 for guiding a game ball distributed to the left of the fourth distribution mechanism 162 to a lower left position of the fourth distribution mechanism 162 is provided. A through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the sixth guide rail 165, and the game ball distributed to the left of the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the sixth guide rail 165 is surely provided. , A prize in the through prize section. As described above, the through winning portion 36 has a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs. Then, the game balls that have passed in the vertical direction through the through holes of the through winning portion 36 are not discharged from the game area PA, but continue flowing down the game area PA. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning section 36 flows vertically downward, it is guided to the second special figure winning apparatus 34 and the special winning section 155 existing to the right of the through winning section 36. Never.

  The right side area PA3 is provided with a seventh guide rail 166 for guiding a game ball distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 to a position vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162. The second special figure prize winning device 34 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the seventh guide rail 166, and the game is distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guide rail 166. If the ball is in a state where the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state, the ball will surely win the second special figure prize winning device 34. As described above, the second special figure prize winning device 34 enters a receiving state triggered by a prize in the through prize winning unit 36. The receiving state ends when one of the game balls wins in the second special figure prize winning device 34 and when the receiving period elapses are satisfied, and returns to the non-receiving state. When one game ball is won in the second special figure prize winning device 34, payout of three game balls is executed and the second special figure holding area 134, as in the fourth embodiment. Is stored.

  On the other hand, if the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state, the game balls distributed vertically below the fourth sorting mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guiding rail 166 are the second special figure prize. Without winning a prize in the prize winning device 34, the second special figure prize winning device 34 vertically penetrates the passage portion 59 a formed by the cover member 59. An eighth guide rail 167 is provided so as to guide the game ball vertically penetrating the passage portion 59a of the second special figure prize winning device 34 further vertically downward. Further, a special winning section 155 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the eighth guide rail 167.

  The special prize section 155 is opened vertically upward, and the game balls that have won the special prize section 155 are guided to the rear side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special prize portion 155 is provided in the form of a gate penetrating in the vertical direction similarly to the through prize portion 36, and the game ball that has won the special prize portion 155 is directly in the game area PA. It is good also as composition which continues flowing down. When one game ball wins in the special winning section 155, three game balls are paid out. Game balls that are distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guide rail 166 but do not win the second special figure prize winning device 34 are specially guided by the eighth guide rail 167. The winning section 155 is reliably won.

  In a configuration in which game balls are sequentially distributed in two directions by the third distribution mechanism 161 and game balls are sequentially distributed in two directions by the fourth distribution mechanism 162, the fourth distribution is performed at the lower left position of the third distribution mechanism 161. When the distributing mechanism 162 is provided, in a situation where both the third distributing mechanism 161 and the fourth distributing mechanism 162 are in a distributing state of distributing the gaming ball to the left, the game ball is transferred to the third distributing mechanism 161. When supplied, the game ball is guided to the through winning unit 36, and both the third sorting mechanism 161 and the fourth sorting mechanism 162 enter a sorting state in which the game balls are sorted vertically downward. In this situation, when a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161, the game ball is not guided to either the second special figure prize winning device 34 or the through prize section 36, and the third distribution mechanism 161 is moved to the left. The game ball is distributed to the distribution state. When a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in that situation, the game ball is guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34, and the third distribution mechanism 161 distributes the game ball vertically downward. At the same time, the fourth distribution mechanism 162 is in a distribution state in which game balls are distributed to the left. In this situation, when a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161, the game ball is not guided to either the second special figure prize winning device 34 or the through prize section 36, and the third distribution mechanism 161 is moved to the left. The game ball is distributed to the distribution state. In this configuration, every time a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161, a state where the game ball is guided to the through winning section 36 → a state where the game ball is not guided to any of the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning section 36 → A state of being guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34 → a state of being guided to neither the second special figure prize winning device 34 nor the through winning part 36 → a state of being guided to the through special winning part 36 → The state in which the ball is guided is sequentially switched.

  In the above configuration, the game balls supplied to the third sorting mechanism 161 in the next order of the game balls to be won in the through winning unit 36 are not guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34, and The game balls supplied to the third sorting mechanism 161 in the next order are guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34. As a result, it is possible to secure a long minimum period required for a game ball to be guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34 after a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs. By using the secured period, it is possible to perform the variable display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 46. In addition, the processing time is set such that the change display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46 is completed within this secured period and the transition of the second special figure prize device 34 to the acceptance state is completed. Even when a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in the shortest firing cycle, a game ball is guided to the second special figure prize device 34 after a prize is generated in the through prize portion 36. By the time, the second special figure prize winning device 34 can be made to be in the receiving state, and the game ball guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34 is surely transferred to the second special figure prize winning device 34. It becomes possible to win a prize.

  The game balls supplied to the third sorting mechanism 161 in the next order of the game balls to be guided to the second special figure prize winning device 34 are not guided to the through prize winning section 36, and further to the next. The game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in order are guided to the through winning unit 36. As a result, it is possible to secure a long minimum period required from the occurrence of a prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 in the accepted state to the occurrence of a prize to the through prize unit 36. When the second special figure prize device 34 is in the receiving state, the prize is invalidated in the through prize unit 36. Further, even if a prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure prize winning device 34, the MPU 112 sets the second special figure prize winning device 34 to a non-accepting state thereafter. Must be executed, and the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalidated until the processing is completed. In this case, the shortest period required from the occurrence of a prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 in the accepted state to the occurrence of a prize to the through prize winning unit 36 is secured long, By the time the game balls supplied to the third sorting mechanism 161 reach the through-prize unit 36 in the next order of the game balls to be won in the second special figure prize device 34, the second special figure prize device 34 is The process of setting the non-acceptance state has been completed, and the transition to the situation where the winning in the through winning unit 36 is valid has been completed.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following different configurations may be individually applied to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the first to third embodiments, in the low probability state, the winning in the through winning unit 36 may be invalidated. , The branch winning device 37 may not be opened. In this case, whether or not the branch winning device 37 is in the open state can be clearly differentiated between the low probability state and the high probability state. In the fourth and fifth embodiments, in the low frequency support mode, the winning in the through winning unit 36 may be invalidated. , The second special figure prize winning device 34 may not be in the receiving state. In this case, whether or not the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state can be clearly differentiated between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

  (2) In the first to third embodiments, in the low probability state, when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46 is reliably executed, and the branch winning device 37 is used. Open / close control may be performed reliably. Even in this case, the opening / closing control of the branch prize device 37 is performed at the timing when the game balls are supplied to the branch prize device 37 by the distribution mechanisms 71 and 72 as in the first to third embodiments. With the configuration in which the branch prize device 37 is already closed and the branch prize device 37 is in the closed state, it is possible to substantially prevent the prize to the branch prize device 37 from occurring in the low probability state. In the low frequency support mode in the fourth and fifth embodiments, when a prize is generated in the through prize winning section 36, the picture variation display on the ordinary figure display section 46 is reliably executed and the second special figure is displayed. A configuration in which the reception control of the winning device 34 is reliably executed may be adopted. Even in this case, as in the fourth and fifth embodiments, at the timing when the game balls are supplied to the second special figure prize winning device 34 by the first distribution mechanism 71, the second special figure prize is won. With the configuration in which the reception control of the device 34 has already been completed and the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, in the low frequency support mode, the prize to the second special figure prize winning device 34 can be achieved. It is possible to substantially prevent the occurrence.

  (3) In the first to third embodiments, in the high probability state, the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is surely executed when a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the high probability state, the open lottery process is executed in response to occurrence of a prize in the through prize winning unit 36 and the branch prize device 37 is opened when the open lottery process results in an open win. It may be configured to be in a state. However, in order to increase the frequency of the branch winning device 37 being opened in the high probability state, it is preferable that the probability of winning in the high probability state be higher than the probability of winning in the low probability state. Further, in the high probability state, it is possible that an open win may not occur. However, an open win may be achieved with a probability of approximately 100%. In the fourth and fifth embodiments, in the high-frequency support mode, the reception control of the second special figure prize winning device 34 is surely executed when the winning in the through prize winning portion 36 occurs. The receiving lottery process is executed in response to the occurrence of a prize in the through-prize unit 36 even in the high-frequency support mode. The special figure prize winning device 34 may be in a receiving state. However, in order to increase the frequency of the second special figure prize winning device 34 in the receiving state in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the high frequency support mode should be higher than the probability of winning in the low frequency support mode. Is preferred. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, it may happen that the winning is not accepted, but the winning may be achieved with a probability of approximately 100%.

  (4) In the first to third embodiments, when the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed in the second high probability state, the opening times in the short opening period are executed first, and after the closing continuation period has elapsed. Although the opening is performed in the long open period, the present invention is not limited to this. The open may be performed once over an open period longer than the long open period. In this case, the timing at which the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started is the same as in the first to third embodiments, and its opening period is set to the shortest with respect to the game ball supplied to the through winning unit 36. The period in which the branch winning device 37 is maintained in the open state also at the timing when the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 reach the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 after three firing cycles. Thus, in the second high probability state, the game ball is supplied to the first distributing mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle, so that the first distributing mechanism is supplied three times later than the game ball supplied to the through winning unit 36. The game ball supplied to 71 enters the branch winning device 37, and the game ball flows into the second derivation area 65d. Further, since the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after and one after the game balls supplied to the through winning unit 36 are not distributed to the branch winning device 37, the branching is performed. Even if the winning device 37 is maintained in the open state, only the three game balls after the above will enter the branch winning device 37.

  (5) In the first to third embodiments, when the first special figure prize winning device 33 is not provided and the game ball that has entered the branch prize winning device 37 flows into the second lead-out area 65d, the second Although the special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state, a configuration may be such that no privilege is given when the special drawing prize winning device 34 flows downstream of the first derivation region 65c. In this case, in any of the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 can flow into the second derivation area 65d, but the second high-probability state is better. A configuration in which a game ball is more likely to flow into the second derived region 65d than the first high probability state may be adopted.

  (6) In the first to third embodiments, the direction of distribution of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is the direction toward the through winning portion 36 and the direction toward the branch entrance 61. And the direction toward the juxtaposition region of the special figure prize winning devices 33 and 34 is not limited to the configuration in three directions, but may be a configuration in four or more directions. For example, the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are arranged so as to be separated from each other in the horizontal direction, and the game ball and the first distributing mechanism 71 distributed vertically downward by the first distributing mechanism 71. In such a configuration, the game balls distributed to the right are guided to different areas, so that the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is set to the through winning unit 36. The direction may be four directions, that is, the direction toward the branch entrance 61, the direction toward the first special figure prize winning device 33, and the direction toward the second special figure prize winning device 34.

  (7) In the first to third embodiments, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the number of distribution states of the second distribution mechanism 72 are the same. Instead, a configuration may be employed in which the number of distribution states is different. For example, as in the first to third embodiments, the number of distribution states of the second distribution mechanism 72 is three, that is, leftward, vertically downward, and rightward. The number of distribution states of the mechanism 71 may be two types: leftward and vertically downward. In this case, the number of game balls required until the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round is six.

  (8) In the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 may not be provided. Even in this case, the first special figure prize winning device 33, the second special figure prize winning device 34, the through prize winning section 36, and the branch winning prize device 37 are collectively arranged in the right area PA3, so that they are directed toward the right area PA3. It is possible to aim at all the prizes of the first special figure prize device 33, the second special figure prize device 34, the through prize section 36 and the branch prize device 37 by continuing the firing operation in which the game balls are supplied. Become.

  (9) In the first to third embodiments, the privilege when the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c of the branch winning device 37 is that the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state. Is a different privilege, and the privilege when the game ball flows into the second derivation area 65d of the branch winning device 37 may be a different privilege than the second special drawing winning device 34 being in the receiving state. . For example, in order to increase the number of game balls that can be used by a player regardless of whether a game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c or a case where a game ball flows into the second derivation area 65d. A configuration in which the processing is executed and the number of game balls to be increased is different between a case where a game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c and a case where a game ball flows into the second derivation region 65d. It may be. In this case, at least one of the number of game balls to be increased may be the same as the number of game balls to be increased when a game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a. May be configured to be smaller than the number of game balls to be increased, or may be configured to be larger than the number of game balls to be increased.

  For example, when a game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c and a game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the hold information is stored in the first special figure holding area 133, When a game ball flows into the second derivation area 65d and a game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the holding information may be stored in the second special figure holding area 134. In this case, even if the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34 are not provided, the type of the hold information according to the result of the flow of the game ball entering the branch winning device 37 is obtained. It is possible to do.

  (10) In the first to third embodiments, when a game ball flows downstream of the first lead-out area 65c in the branch winning device 37, the first special figure winning device 33 is surely in the receiving state. Instead, the first special drawing prize winning device 33 may be configured to be in the receiving state by receiving a winning in the lottery process executed when the game ball is detected by the first trigger detecting sensor 66b. As a result, the situation in which the first special map winning device 33 is in the receiving state is diversified. Further, when a game ball flows into the second lead-out area 65d of the branch winning device 37, the second special figure winning device 34 does not reliably enter the receiving state, and the game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. The second special figure prize winning device 34 may be configured to be in an accepting state by receiving a winning in a lottery process executed in response to the detection. Thereby, the situation where the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state is diversified.

  (11) In the first to third embodiments, the configuration is limited to the configuration in which the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into either the downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c or the second lead-out area 65d. Instead, the configuration may be such that it flows into one of three or more types of derivation regions. For example, a third special figure prize device is provided separately from the first special figure prize device 33 and the second special figure prize device 34, and when a game ball that has entered the branch prize device 37 flows into the third derivation region. May be configured such that the acceptance control of the third special figure prize winning device is executed. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the branching mode of the game ball in the branch winning device 37.

  (12) In the first to third embodiments, even if a game ball is detected by the branch game detection sensor 66a of the branch game winning device 37, the payout of the game ball may not be executed, and the first opportunity detection sensor 66b Alternatively, when the game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the payout of the game ball for winning to the branch winning device 37 may be executed.

  (13) In the first to third embodiments, the switching piece 67 is always located at the retreat position in the first high probability state, and the switching piece 67 is always located at the guidance position in the second high probability state. Alternatively, the configuration may be as follows. Even in this case, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 in the first high probability state reliably flows into the first derivation area 65c, and the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 in the second high probability state. The sphere surely flows into the second lead-out area 65d.

  (14) In the first to third embodiments, even if the game ball is a game ball other than the game ball distributed to the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the first special figure prize winning device 33, the second At least one of the special drawing prize unit 34, the through prize unit 36, and the branch prize unit 37 may be configured to be capable of winning. As a result, it is possible to diversify the route in which a prize is generated in the prize unit.

  (15) In the first to third embodiments, one game ball wins in the branch winning device 37 and two game balls win one of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. The configuration is such that the same number of game balls as the number of game balls required to make one round of the combination of the respective distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is paid out, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the total payout number of the game balls due to the prize may be smaller or larger than the number of the game balls required for one round. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when one game ball wins in the second special figure prize winning device 34, the number of game balls required for the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 to make one round is reduced. Although the same number of game balls are paid out, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game balls to be paid out for the prize in the second special figure prize winning device 34 is required for the above-mentioned round. The configuration may be smaller or larger than the number.

  (16) In the first to third embodiments, the switching between the receiving state and the non-receiving state in the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 is performed by electric drive. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be performed by physical driving. For example, in order to provide a displaceable first receiving portion at a position where a game ball flowing into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c surely collides, and to switch the first special figure prize winning device 33 from a non-accepting state to an accepting state. And the first receiving portion are connected using the space on the back side of the game board 24. Then, when a game ball is received in the first receiving portion, the first receiving portion is displaced and the first special figure prize winning device 33 switches from the non-accepting state to the receiving state. Further, the first special figure prize winning device 33 is provided with a second receiving portion at a position where a game ball that has won the first special figure prize winning device 33 surely collides, and two game balls are provided in the second receiving portion. In the case where the first special figure prize winning device 33 is switched from the accepting state to the non-accepting state when the displacement amount of the second receiving portion becomes the displacement amount corresponding to receiving the two game balls. Configuration. In addition, a displaceable third receiving portion is provided at a position where the game ball flowing into the second derivation region 65d surely collides, and a member for switching the second special figure prize winning device 34 from the non-accepting state to the receiving state. The third receiving portion is connected using the space on the back side of the game board 24. Then, when a game ball is received in the third receiving portion, the third receiving portion is displaced and the second special figure prize winning device 34 switches from the non-accepting state to the receiving state. Further, the second special figure prize winning device 34 is provided with a fourth receiving portion at a position where a game ball that has won the second special figure prize winning device 34 reliably collides, and two gaming balls are provided in the fourth receiving portion. When the second special figure prize device 34 is received, the displacement amount of the fourth receiving portion becomes the displacement amount corresponding to the reception of two game balls, and the second special figure prize winning device 34 switches from the receiving state to the non-receiving state. Configuration. According to the above configuration, the MPU 112 does not need to execute the acceptance control of the first special figure prize winning device 33 and the second special figure prize winning device 34.

  (17) In the third embodiment, the special prize section 142 is not provided at a position vertically below the branch entrance 61 but the special prize section 142 is provided at a position vertically below the through prize section 36. Configuration. In this case, the special prize unit 142 is sent to the branch prize device 37 regardless of whether or not a prize occurs in the branch prize device 37 during one round of the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72. Will be awarded. Therefore, when no prize occurs in the branch prize winning device 37, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 perform the first circulation while the combination of the respective distribution states makes one rotation. When the same number of game balls as the game balls supplied to the distribution mechanism 71 are paid out and a prize is generated in the branch prize device 37, each distribution of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is performed. During one round of the state combination, a larger number of game balls are paid out than the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 during the one round.

  (18) In the fourth embodiment, the special prize portion 155 is not provided at a position vertically below the second special figure prize device 34, but the special prize portion 155 is provided at a position vertically below the through prize portion 36. Alternatively, a configuration provided at a position guided by the first guide rail 152 may be employed. In this case, a prize is generated in the special prize unit 155 regardless of whether or not a prize is generated in the second special figure prize device 34 while the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one round. Become. Therefore, when no prize is generated in the second special figure prize winning device 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 during one rotation while the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one rotation. When the same number of game balls are paid out and a prize is generated in the second special figure prize device 34, the first allocating mechanism 71 makes one lap while the allocating state makes one lap. In the meantime, a larger number of game balls than the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are paid out.

  (19) The distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the positional relationship between the second special figure prize device 34 and the through prize portion 36 are not limited to those in the fourth embodiment. For example, a through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where a game ball distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided, and a game ball distributed vertically downward is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71. The second special figure prize winning device 34 may be provided at a position or a position where the game ball distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided. In addition, a through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game balls distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71 are guided, and the game balls distributed leftward are guided by the first distribution mechanism 71. The second special figure prize winning device 34 may be provided at a position or a position where the game ball distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided.

  (20) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, when the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state, one game ball enters the second special figure prize winning device 34, and the second special figure prize winning device 34 receives the second special figure prize winning device 34. The special figure prize winning device 34 is not limited to the non-accepting state. The second special figure prize winning device is provided when a predetermined number of two or more game balls enter the second special figure prize winning device 34. 34 may be in a non-accepting state. In this case, even if the second special figure prize winning device 34 is in the receiving state in a predetermined lap when the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one lap, the second special figure prize winning device 34 is not circulated in a lap after the predetermined lap. The condition for the 2 special figure prize winning device 34 to switch to the non-accepting state is satisfied.

  (21) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, when the game information corresponding to the departure result is repeatedly executed by using the hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as second hold information) of the second special figure holding area 134, The shortest prize cycle, the fixed short period and the fixed long period for the second special figure prize winning device 34 are set so that the game period for the fixed long period is performed once after the game period for the fixed short period is performed 10 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that a fixed number of times of game play for a fixed long period is performed once after a predetermined number of times of less than 10 times, A configuration may be adopted in which after a predetermined number of game rounds with a fixed short period of time greater than 10, the game round with a fixed long period is performed once. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of predetermined times of game times are performed for a fixed short period, whereas two or three times of game times are performed for a fixed long period.

  (22) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the fixed short period is not limited to only one type, and a plurality of periods shorter than the shortest prize cycle to the second special figure prize device 34 are provided. A configuration may exist in which types exist. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the fixed long period is only one type, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of periods that are equal to or longer than the shortest prize cycle to the second special figure prize winning device 34 may be provided. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of the game times.

  (23) The first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 according to the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 according to the fourth embodiment, and the first distribution mechanism 71 according to the fifth embodiment. The entering ball portions to which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means such as the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 are not limited to those in the above embodiments. For example, the distribution target of the game balls by the distribution means may be the general prize unit 31 and the special prize winning device 35, the first special figure normal prize unit 32, the second special figure prize winning device 34, and the special prize winning device. 35.

  (24) The first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 according to the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 according to the fourth embodiment, and the first distribution mechanism 71 according to the fifth embodiment. The distribution means such as the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 is not limited to a configuration in which the distribution direction is changed each time one game ball is supplied to the distribution means, When the distribution state of the distribution means is a state in which the game balls are distributed in the predetermined distribution direction, when the game balls of two or more trigger numbers are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution direction differs from the predetermined distribution direction. It may be configured to change to a state where game balls are distributed in the distribution direction. In addition, when the game balls are distributed in the predetermined distribution direction, when two or more game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game balls are distributed in the distribution direction different from the predetermined distribution direction. It changes to a state of distributing balls, and in the case of a state where game balls are distributed in a specific distribution direction, when a number of game balls different from the number of triggers are supplied to the distribution means, a specific distribution direction and May be changed to a state where game balls are distributed in different distribution directions.

  (25) In the above first to third embodiments, winning in the through winning unit 36 is invalid in a situation where the acceptance control is being performed for either the first special figure winning device 33 or the second special figure winning device 34. However, even if the reception control is being executed, the winning in the through winning unit 36 is validated, and if a winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs in this situation, the general It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variation display of the pattern on the display unit 46 is started, and after the variation display of the pattern, the opening control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, the game balls necessary for the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 to be switched from the accepting state to the non-accepting state by the special figure prize apparatuses 33 and 34 are transferred to the special figure prize apparatuses 33 and 34. In the case where game balls are supplied to the through winning unit 36 in a situation where they are not supplied, it is possible to prevent a waiting time until the winning in the through winning unit 36 is activated. It becomes. In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the winning in the through winning unit 36 is invalidated when the receiving control is being performed on the second special figure winning device 34. However, the receiving control is executed. The winning in the through winning unit 36 is validated even in the situation where the winning is performed, and when the winning in the through winning unit 36 occurs in the situation, the variation display of the picture on the general map display unit 46 is started. At the same time, the reception control of the second special figure prize winning device 34 may be started after the change display of the picture. In this case, the first distribution mechanism 71 is set to a through state in a situation where the game balls necessary for the second special figure prize winning device 34 to switch from the accepting state to the non-accepting state are not supplied to the second special figure prize winning device 34. When the configuration is such that the game balls are supplied to the winning unit 36, it is possible to prevent a waiting time until the winning in the through winning unit 36 is activated.

  (26) In the first to third embodiments, the situation in which the picture is changed and displayed on the ordinary figure display unit 46, the situation in which the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, and the special figure winning device In the case where a prize has occurred in the through prize section 36 while the acceptance control of 33 and 34 is being executed, the trigger information for the prize is held and stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as an upper limit. It may be. Then, the situation in which the picture variation display is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 46, the situation in which the opening and closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, and the situation in which the acceptance control of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are executed. If the trigger information is held and stored in a situation other than the above, the variable display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46 is started with the trigger information as a trigger. Thereby, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 to be executed. Further, in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the through display is performed in a situation in which the pattern of the pattern is changed and displayed on the general-purpose display section 46 and a situation in which the reception control of the second special figure prize device 34 is being executed. When a winning in the winning unit 36 occurs, the trigger information for the winning may be held and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Then, the trigger information is held and stored in a situation other than the situation in which the variation display of the picture is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 46 or the situation in which the acceptance control of the second special figure prize winning device 34 is executed. In this case, the variable display of the picture on the general-purpose display section 46 is started with the trigger information as a trigger. Thereby, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 to be executed.

  (27) The opening period of the branch winning device 37 may be longer or shorter than the period in the first to third embodiments. Further, the receiving period of the second special figure prize winning device 34 may be longer or shorter than the above-described fourth and fifth embodiments.

  (28) In the first to third embodiments, the first special figure prize device 33 and the second special figure prize device 34 may be arranged upside down.

  (29) The special prize winning device 35 includes a V prize area, a distribution member for distributing game balls to one of the V prize area and another area, and a V prize detection sensor for detecting a game ball flowing into the V prize area. And a winning / rejecting lottery mode after the execution of the open / close execution mode may be a high probability mode when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode is performed in such a manner that the game ball can flow into the V winning area when the result of the high-accuracy correspondence is obtained, and the opening / closing execution mode is performed when the result of the low-accuracy correspondence is obtained. The opening / closing execution mode is performed in such a manner that the inflow of the game ball becomes impossible. In addition, a separate prize device provided with a V prize detection sensor is provided separately from the special prize device 35, and the opening / closing execution mode is set in such a manner that a prize can be awarded to the separate prize device when a highly accurate result is obtained. The opening / closing execution mode may be performed in such a manner that when the low prize correspondence result is obtained, the prize can be won in the separate prize device.

  (30) In the first to third embodiments, when the game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the acceptance control of the first special figure prize device 33 is executed, the first special figure prize device 33 is executed. Is opened only once, but the first special figure prize winning device 33 may be opened a plurality of times. In this case, the first opening rotation occurs in a predetermined rotation when each of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one rotation, and the second opening rotation is performed in a predetermined rotation. On the other hand, it may be configured to generate at the timing when game balls can be supplied to the first special figure prize winning device 33 in the next round. When the game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c and the reception control of the second special figure prize device 34 is executed, the second special figure prize device 34 is opened only once. The second special figure winning device 34 may be opened a plurality of times. In this case, the first opening rotation occurs in a predetermined rotation when each of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one rotation, and the second opening rotation is performed in a predetermined rotation. On the other hand, it may be configured to generate at the timing when game balls can be supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 in the next lap.

  (31) In each of the above embodiments, when the high probability state is reached, the high probability state is not limited to the configuration in which the high probability state continues until the next big hit result occurs. The high probability state may be ended when the number of game times is executed. In this case, it is possible to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state even if the jackpot result does not occur. Therefore, for example, when a jackpot result occurs in response to the hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 133, the result is either the low-accuracy correspondence result or the high-accuracy correspondence result, whereas the second special figure hold is performed. When a jackpot result occurs with the suspension information stored in the area 134 as a trigger, the configuration may be such that a highly accurate response result is ensured.

  (32) In the first to third embodiments, when the jackpot result is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the first high-accuracy correspondence result is not set. It is good also as a structure which can become a 1st highly accurate result.

  (33) The number of prize balls is not limited to the number of prize balls in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls when one game ball wins in the second special figure prize winning device 34 is the first prize ball. The configuration may be more or less than the number of award balls when one game ball wins in the special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. In addition, the configuration is different between the number of prize balls when one game ball wins in the first special figure normal winning section 32 and the number of award balls when one game ball wins in the first special figure winning device 33. It may be. In this case, the former prize ball number may be larger or smaller than the latter prize ball number.

  (34) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 126 is controlled by the sound emission control device 121 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 101, display control is performed based on a command transmitted from the main control device 101. The device 126 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 121. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 121 and the display control device 126 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be adopted. May be integrated in the main control device 101, and both functions of the two control devices may be integrated in the main control device 101. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 101 to the audio light emission control device 121 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 121 to the display control device 126 are also arbitrary.

  (35) The device in which the effect for the game is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the game is executed by the operation of the movable decorative member. It may be configured such that an effect for game play is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, and an effect for game play is executed by a combination of all or some of the above aspects. Good.

  (36) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the first special figure holding area 133 and the second special figure holding area 134 are not separately provided, and the first special figure normal winning section 32 and the second special figure Regardless of which of the winning devices 34 a game ball enters, the holding information may be stored in a common special figure holding area. In this case, the hold information acquired by the winning in the first special figure normal winning section 32 and the suspend information acquired by the winning in the second special figure winning device 34 are stored separately. Therefore, the hit / fail determination processing and the distribution determination processing are executed in the same manner regardless of the pending information.

  (37) In each of the above embodiments, the present invention is limited to the configuration in which the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 is digested with priority over the hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 133. Instead, the reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 133 may be digested in preference to the reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 134. The information may be digested in the acquisition order.

  (38) The case where the hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 133 is the target of the hit / fail determination, and the case where the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 is the target of the hit / hit determination. In this case, the distribution mode of the jackpot results may be the same.

  (39) Other types of pachinko machines, such as pachinko machines, which are different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, and a sparrow ball.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided in a circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols has been established on the activated line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame includes a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are circulated without being discharged to island facilities. Further, it is impossible for the player to refill the game balls into the pachinko machine, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is managed as data, and the firing operation is performed when the number of usable game balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which a game ball is fired when performed and the number of usable game balls is subtracted. In this case, when a prize occurs in the first special figure prize device 33, the second special figure prize device 34, the branch prize device 37, the special prize units 142, 155, etc., and a prize ball is generated, a game that can be used. The number of balls will increase on the data.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A predetermined ball entry section (branch entrance 61) into which game balls flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which a game ball having entered the predetermined ball input portion flows down;
Predetermined detection means (branch winning detection sensor 66a) for detecting a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion;
A predetermined providing unit (a function of executing the processing of step S905 in the MPU 112, the payout control device 107) for providing a privilege to the player when the game ball is detected by the predetermined detecting unit;
The predetermined passage portion is provided on the downstream side of the detection area by the predetermined detection means, and a game ball passing through the detection area is provided with a first area (downstream side of the first derivation area 65c) and a second area (second derivation). Guiding means (switching piece 67) for guiding to any one of a plurality of areas including the area 65d);
First granting means for granting the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when a game ball flows into the first area (a function of executing the processing of steps S704, S705 and S908 in the MPU 112) When,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the privilege is not only provided by the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion, but also the privilege is provided by the game ball entering the predetermined ball portion flowing into the first area. Granted. As a result, a plurality of benefits are provided by the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry section, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry section. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, when a game ball is detected by the predetermined detection means provided upstream of the guidance means for guiding the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion to any area, a privilege is given, and further the guidance means is provided. This is also a configuration in which a privilege is given when a game ball flows into the first area on the downstream side. Thereby, even if the passage length dimension of the predetermined passage portion continuing to the first area is increased, it is possible to early give a privilege for a game ball having entered the predetermined entry portion. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the passage configuration of the predetermined passage portion that continues to the first region, while enabling the privilege to be given to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion at an early stage. .

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein even if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage does not flow into the first area, another benefit different from the benefit provided by the predetermined providing means is provided.

  According to the feature A2, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion, regardless of whether the game ball flows into the first area, the privilege for detecting the game ball by the predetermined detection means. A different privilege is provided. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry section.

  In addition, the above configuration is provided with the configuration of the above-mentioned feature A1, and regardless of which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage section flows into, the predetermined detection means provided upstream of the guidance position by the guidance means. When a game ball is detected, a privilege is given. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing a configuration for guiding to any one of the areas while allowing the benefit to be given to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry section to be provided at an early stage.

  Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the type of the privilege provided by the predetermined providing unit and the type of the benefit provided by the first providing unit are different.

  According to the feature A3, a plurality of types of benefits are given when a game ball enters the predetermined entry section. This makes it possible to diversify the types of benefits to be granted. In addition, the award of the privilege by the predetermined providing means is performed by detecting the game ball by the predetermined detecting means on the upstream side of the guidance position by the guiding means, and the grant of the privilege by the first providing means is performed by the guidance position by the guiding means. This is also performed when the game ball flows into the first area on the downstream side. Accordingly, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of benefits are provided when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section, the plurality of types of benefits can be provided stepwise.

Feature A4. The predetermined granting means, when a game ball is detected by the predetermined detection means, grants a privilege to increase the number of game balls available to the player,
Any of the features A1 to A3, wherein when the game ball flows into the first region, the first granting unit grants a privilege different from a privilege for increasing the number of game balls available to the player. 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A4, a plurality of types of benefits are given when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section. This makes it possible to diversify the types of benefits to be granted. Further, by detecting the game ball by the predetermined detection means on the upstream side of the guidance position by the guidance means, a privilege for increasing the number of game balls available to the player is first given, and thereafter, the guidance position by the guidance means When the game balls flow into the first area further downstream, a privilege different from the privilege of increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is provided. Thus, it is possible to gradually grant a plurality of types of benefits while giving the benefits to increase the number of game balls available to the player at an early stage.

Feature A5. First variable ball entry means (first special figure prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot or cannot be entered. 33)
The first assigning means may cause the first variable entering means to be in the first state when a game ball flows into the first area, wherein The described gaming machine.

  According to the feature A5, when a game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion and flows down the predetermined passage portion has flowed into the first region, the first variable ball entry device enters the first state. In this case, the player who expects the first variable ball entry means to be in the first state plays the game while expecting the game ball that entered the predetermined ball entry section to flow into the first region. . By providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature A1 in the configuration, the bonus is provided by the predetermined providing unit by detecting the game ball by the predetermined detecting unit upstream of the guiding position by the guiding unit. Thereby, in order to secure a period in which the player pays attention to whether the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry part flows into the first area, the distance from the predetermined ball entry part to the guidance position by the guidance means is set to some extent. Even if it secures, it becomes possible to grant a privilege for having a game ball enter a predetermined ball entry section at an early stage.

Feature A6. Second variable ball entry means (second special figure prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot or cannot be entered. 34)
Second providing means (steps S804, S805 and step S805 in the MPU 112) for causing the second variable ball-in means to enter the first state when a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area. A function of executing the process of S910);
The gaming machine according to feature A5, comprising:

  According to the feature A6, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball-in means becomes the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. The second variable ball entry means is in the first state. Accordingly, the type of the variable ball-in means which is in the first state is different depending on the mode of guidance by the guidance means, and the player is informed to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage is guided. Can be raised.

Feature A7. A lottery process is performed based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the first variable ball entry unit, and a lottery process is performed based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the second variable ball entry unit. (A function of executing the processing of step S1001, step S1102, and step S1103 in the MPU 112)
In the case where the lottery process is executed based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means, the entry of a game ball into the first variable ball entry means occurs. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, which is more advantageous to the player than when the lottery process is executed based on the above.

  According to the feature A7, it is more advantageous for a player to enter a game ball into the second variable ball entry means than to enter a game ball into the first variable ball entry means. Thereby, the player expects that the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry section will be guided to the second area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A8. When the game state is the first game state (first high probability state), the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or flows into the first region is determined by the first region. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein is higher than a probability of flowing into a different area.

  According to the feature A8, in the first game state, the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion reliably flows into the first region or flows into the first region increases. This makes it possible to create a state in which game balls easily flow into the first area.

Feature A9. Switching control means (switching the normal figure variation in the MPU 112) for controlling the predetermined ball entry portion to switch between a first state in which game balls can be entered and a second state in which game balls cannot be entered. Function to execute the middle process and the process during the normal power operation)
As the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry part is guided to the first area, and a game entering the predetermined ball entry part A second situation in which a sphere is guided to said second region,
In the first gaming state, the probability that the first situation or the first situation becomes the first situation in a situation where the game ball can enter the predetermined entering section is higher than the probability that the second situation occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the gaming machine is also high.

  According to the feature A9, it is impossible or difficult for the predetermined ball entry section to enter a game ball in the second state, and the game ball can enter in the first state. As a result, a player expecting a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry unit will pay attention to whether the predetermined ball entry unit is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. The situation is the first situation or is likely to be the first situation. This makes it possible to create a state in which the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state and the game ball is likely to flow into the first region.

Feature A10. Second granting means for granting the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when the game ball flows into the second area (a function of executing the processing of steps S804, S805 and S910 in the MPU 112) With
When the game state is the second game state (the second high probability state), the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region or flows into the second region is in the first region. The gaming machine according to feature A8 or A9, wherein the gaming machine has a higher probability of inflow.

  According to the feature A10, in the first game state, the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or flows into the first region increases, while the predetermined ball portion flows in the second game state. The probability that the flowing game ball flows into the second region or flows into the second region is increased. This makes it possible to create a state in which game balls easily flow into the first area and a state in which game balls easily flow into the second area.

Feature A11. Switching control means (switching the normal figure variation in the MPU 112) for controlling the predetermined ball entry portion to switch between a first state in which game balls can be entered and a second state in which game balls cannot be entered. Function to execute the middle process and the process during the normal power operation)
As the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry part is guided to the first area, and a game entering the predetermined ball entry part A second situation in which a sphere is guided to said second region,
In the first gaming state, the probability that the first situation or the first situation becomes the first situation in a situation where the game ball can enter the predetermined entering section is higher than the probability that the second situation occurs. Is also a high configuration,
In the second game state, the probability that the second situation or the second situation will be the first situation is greater than the probability that the second situation or the second situation is achieved in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined entering section. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the gaming machine also has a high configuration.

  According to the feature A11, it is impossible or difficult for the predetermined ball entry section to enter a game ball in the second state, and the game ball can enter in the first state. As a result, a player expecting a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry unit will pay attention to whether the predetermined ball entry unit is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. The situation is the first situation or is likely to be the first situation. In the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. Is likely to be the second situation or the second situation. Thereby, the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area, and the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area Can easily be created.

Feature A12. Switching control means (switching the normal figure variation in the MPU 112) for controlling the predetermined ball entry portion to switch between a first state in which game balls can be entered and a second state in which game balls cannot be entered. Function to execute the middle process and the process during the normal power operation)
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on a game ball having entered a specific ball entry portion (through winning portion 36),
On the upstream side of the specific ball entry section and the predetermined ball entry section in the game area, the supplied game ball is placed in one of a plurality of types of distribution directions including a first distribution direction and a second distribution direction. Allocating means (a first allocating mechanism 71 and a second allocating mechanism 72) for sequentially changing the distribution direction when a game ball is supplied,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein a game ball is supplied to the predetermined ball entry section in such a case.

  According to the feature A12, the predetermined entering ball portion enters the first state on the assumption that a game ball has entered the specific entering ball portion. As a result, a player expecting a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry unit will also pay attention to whether a game ball enters the specific ball entry unit. In this case, distribution means for sequentially changing the distribution direction in response to the supply of the game ball is provided upstream of the specific ball entry section and the predetermined ball entry section. When the direction is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction, the game ball is directed to the predetermined entering ball portion. Is supplied. Thereby, it becomes possible to supply the game balls to the specific ball entry portion by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, and to the predetermined ball entry portion. It becomes possible to supply a game ball. In addition, by appropriately designing the configuration of the distributing means, the frequency at which game balls are supplied to the specific ball entry portion and the frequency at which game balls are supplied to the predetermined ball entry portion are determined by the designer, respectively. The frequency can be set. Furthermore, it becomes possible to supply the game ball to the predetermined ball entry portion after a predetermined period has elapsed after the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry portion, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry portion. It is possible to ensure that the game ball is supplied to the predetermined ball entry portion in the first state when the predetermined ball entry portion is in the first state with at least one condition that the game ball has been played. .

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, wherein when a specific number of gaming balls are supplied to the distribution unit, the distribution state of the distribution unit makes one round.

  According to the feature A13, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it is possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a certain mode.

  Feature A14. Only the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific ball entry portion, and only the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means The gaming machine according to the feature A12 or A13, wherein the game machine can enter the predetermined ball entry section.

  According to the feature A14, only the game balls distributed by the distribution means can enter the specific entering portion and the predetermined entering portion. This makes it easy to design the frequency of entering the specific ball entry section and the predetermined ball entry section to a desired frequency.

  Feature A15. Game balls to be supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit are distributed in the second distribution direction. The gaming machine according to any one of A14.

  According to the feature A15, the game balls supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number are distributed in the second distribution direction to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit, so that the specific incoming ball is provided. It is possible to secure a period from when a game ball enters the section to when a game ball is supplied to a predetermined entry section. With this, when the predetermined entering ball portion is in the first state with at least one condition that the game ball enters the specific entering ball portion, the gaming ball is placed in the first entering portion in the first state. In the case where the game is supplied, it is possible to secure a period until the predetermined ball entry unit is brought into the first state when the game ball enters the specific ball entry unit.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the predetermined number is two or more.

  According to the feature A16, it is possible to secure a somewhat long period from when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section to when a game ball is supplied to the predetermined ball entry section. With this, when the predetermined entering ball portion is in the first state with at least one condition that the game ball enters the specific entering ball portion, the gaming ball is placed in the first entering portion in the first state. In the case where it is ensured to be supplied, it is possible to secure a certain length of time as a period until the predetermined entering part is brought into the first state when the game ball enters the specific entering part. Become.

Feature A17. An operation execution means (general-purpose display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on a game ball having entered the specific entry unit;
The switching control unit is configured to start the switching control when the switching control is performed and the pre-switching operation started based on a game ball having entered the specific ball input unit is completed. A gaming machine according to feature A15 or A16.

  According to the feature A17, when a game ball enters the specific entry section, the operation executing means executes the pre-switching operation, and when the pre-switching operation ends, the predetermined entry section enters the first state. . Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that there is a possibility that the predetermined ball entry section will be in the first state. In addition, the manager of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the transition to the first state of the predetermined ball entry section is normal by confirming whether or not the pre-switching operation has been performed. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature A15 or A16, a certain period is set as a period from when the game ball enters the specific entry portion to when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entry portion. Is secured. With this, when the predetermined entering ball portion is in the first state with at least one condition that the game ball enters the specific entering ball portion, the gaming ball is placed in the first entering portion in the first state. In a case where the supply is surely performed, it is possible to secure a period during which the pre-switching operation is executed by the operation executing unit before the predetermined ball entry unit enters the first state.

Feature A18. As the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry part is guided to the first area, and a game entering the predetermined ball entry part A second situation in which a sphere is guided to said second region,
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (the first high probability state), the first situation or the first situation is reached in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. The probability is higher than the probability of the second situation,
When the game state is the second game state (the second high probability state), the second state or the second state is set in a state in which a game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. The probability is higher than the probability of the first situation,
In the first situation, when game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means are determined. A game ball that was later supplied to the sorting means and that entered the predetermined ball entry section was guided to the first area,
In the second situation, when a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in the predetermined supply cycle, the game ball distributed in the first allocating direction by the allocating means has a predetermined size. The game balls supplied to the allocating means after the number, and the game balls entering the predetermined ball entry section are guided to the second area, wherein any one of the features A15 to A17 is provided. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A18, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. Is the first situation or tends to be the first situation. In the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. Is likely to be the second situation or the second situation. Thereby, the state where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area, and the state where the predetermined ball entry part is in the second state and the game ball is in the first area. Can easily be created.

  In this case, when game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, in the first situation, after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific ball input section, the distribution means returns to the distribution means. The supplied game balls enter the predetermined ball entry section and are supplied to the first area, and in the second situation, are supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific ball entry section. Game balls enter the predetermined ball entry section and are supplied to the second area. Thus, while the operation mode of the distribution means is a common mode, the game balls are supplied to the first area in the first situation and the game balls are supplied to the second area in the second situation. It becomes possible. In the first situation, the number of game balls required from the supply of the game ball to the specific ball entry section to the supply of the game ball to the predetermined ball entry section is set to a common number. In the second situation, a ball is supplied and a game ball can be supplied to the second area.

Feature A19. Based on the timing at which the switching control is started, in a first period, a guiding state in which game balls are guided to the first region is established, and in a second period, guidance in which game balls are guided to the second region. A guidance control means for controlling the guidance means so as to be in a state (a function of executing steps S510, S511 and S612 to S614 in the MPU 112);
In the first situation, when a game ball is supplied to the distribution unit at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined distribution is performed on the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit. The switching is performed such that the first period is reached when the game balls supplied to the allocating means after the number and the game balls entered the predetermined ball input portion pass through the guidance position by the guidance means. Control start timing is set,
In the second situation, when a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in the predetermined supply cycle, the game ball distributed in the first allocating direction by the allocating means has a predetermined size. The switching is performed such that the second period is reached when the game balls supplied to the allocating means after the number and the game balls entering the predetermined ball input section pass the guidance position by the guidance means. The gaming machine according to Feature A18, wherein a control start timing is set.

  According to the feature A19, the excellent effect as described in the above-described feature A18 can be obtained only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the predetermined ball entry portion corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation. It becomes possible.

Feature A20. An operation execution means (general-purpose display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on a game ball having entered the specific entry unit;
The switching control unit is configured to start the switching control when the switching control is performed and the pre-switching operation started based on a game ball having entered the specific ball input unit is completed. Yes,
The gaming machine causes the operation execution unit to perform the pre-switching operation in the first situation over a period corresponding to the first situation, and in the second situation during the period corresponding to the second situation. Operation control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, the steps S1211 and S12 in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature A19, further comprising a function of executing the process of S1212).

  According to the feature A20, the excellent effect as described in the above-described feature A18 can be obtained only by adjusting the period during which the pre-switching operation is performed in the operation execution unit in accordance with each of the first situation and the second situation. It becomes possible.

Feature A21. First variable ball entry means (first special figure prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot or cannot be entered. 33)
The first assigning means, when a game ball flows into the first area, the first variable ball entry means so as to enter the first state,
A third distribution direction is set as a distribution direction by the distribution means,
The game ball is supplied to the first variable ball entry means when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction, wherein any one of the features A12 to A20 is provided. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A21, when a game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion and flows down the predetermined passage portion has flowed into the first region, the first variable ball entry device enters the first state. In this case, the player who expects the first variable ball entry means to be in the first state plays the game while expecting the game ball that entered the predetermined ball entry section to flow into the first region. . In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. The game ball is supplied to the predetermined ball input section, and the game ball is supplied to the first variable ball input means when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction. Thereby, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game balls are supplied to each of the specific ball entry section, the predetermined ball entry section and the first variable ball entry section in a predetermined order. It is possible to do so.

  Feature A22. The feature A21 is characterized in that game balls to be supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution unit are distributed in the first distribution direction. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A22, the game balls supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number are distributed in the first distribution direction to the game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution unit, whereby the first ball is distributed in the first distribution direction. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means to when the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry section.

Feature A23. When the distributing means is in a state of distributing gaming balls in the third distributing direction, the third distributing direction is required until the distributing means is in a state of distributing gaming balls in the first distributing direction. In this configuration, a special number of game balls are distributed to
When the first variable ball entry means enters the first state when a game ball flows into the first area, the switching variable number of game balls enters the first variable ball entry means. (The function of executing the processing of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112) with the first variable pitching means in the second state based on
The gaming machine according to feature A21 or A22, wherein the special number is equal to or greater than the switching trigger number.

  According to the feature A23, when the first variable ball inputting means is in the first state, the distribution ball is supplied to the first variable ball inputting means by the distribution means by the number of switching triggers. The distribution state of the means is a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific entry section. Thereby, when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball can be supplied to the specific ball entry section after the first variable ball entry means is in the second state. Thus, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entry section in a situation where the first variable ball entry means is in the second state.

Feature A24. First variable ball entry means (first special figure prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot or cannot be entered. 33)
Second variable ball entry means (second special figure prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot or cannot be entered. 34)
With
The first assigning means, when a game ball flows into the first area, the first variable ball entry means so as to enter the first state,
The gaming machine is provided with a second assigning means (step S804 in the MPU 112) for causing the second variable ball-in means to be in the first state when a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area. , A function of executing the processing of step S805 and step S910).
The first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means are provided side by side in the downflow direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and are located upstream of the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means. When the provided variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game balls flowing into the aggregation area can flow down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side,
A third distribution direction is set as a distribution direction by the distribution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A23, wherein when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the aggregation area.

  According to the feature A24, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball-in means becomes the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. The second variable ball entry means is in the first state. Accordingly, the type of the variable ball-in means which is in the first state is different depending on the mode of guidance by the guidance means, and the player is informed to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage is guided. Can be raised. In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. A game ball is supplied toward a predetermined ball entry section, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction, an aggregation area provided with the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means A game ball is supplied toward. Thereby, by playing the game so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means, it is possible to supply the game ball to each of the specific ball entry portion and the predetermined ball entry portion in a predetermined order. In addition, even if a game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion is guided to either the first region or the second region, the game ball is supplied to the variable ball entry means corresponding to the guided region. It is possible to do.

  In particular, the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means are provided side by side in the downflow direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means is provided. When the variable ball-in means provided in is in the second state, the game balls flowing into the aggregation area flow down toward the variable ball-in means provided on the downstream side. Thereby, even if it does not have to be configured such that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are individually divided by the distribution means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can be used. It is possible to supply the game balls to the side of the means that is in the first state.

Feature A25. When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
The specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A24, wherein a process for increasing the number of gaming balls by at least the specific number can be executed.

  According to the feature A25, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, and thus the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it is possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a certain mode. In this case, a specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls to a specific number or more may be executed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a game is played such that game balls are supplied to the distribution means, while the number of game balls that can be used by the player is not substantially reduced.

  Feature A26. When each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means generates a ball entering the specific ball entry section and a ball entry to the predetermined ball entry section until the distribution state makes one round, the distribution is performed. Based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means until the state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls are given to the player or the game balls usable by the player. The gaming machine according to Feature A25, wherein processing for increasing the number by at least the specific number is executed.

  According to the feature A26, when a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in a state where a ball entering the specific ball entry section and a ball entry to the predetermined ball entry section can occur, the distribution state becomes one round. A certain number or more of game balls are given to a player or the number of game balls usable by a player is increased by a certain number or more based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means before the game is distributed. A process is performed to cause the operation to be performed. With this, when a game is performed such that a game ball is supplied to the sorting means in a state where a ball can enter the specific ball entry section and a ball entry to the predetermined ball entry section, the player A game can be played while the number of usable game balls is not substantially reduced.

Feature A27. When the game ball distributed by the distributing means does not enter the predetermined entering ball portion by one round of the distribution state, the game ball distributed by the distributing means enters the special ball. It has a ball entry section (special prize section 142),
Based on that a corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means before the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls are played. The gaming machine according to feature A25 or A26, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls provided to the player or usable by the player by the specific number or more is executed.

  According to the feature A27, even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry section, the game ball distributed by the sorting means enters the special ball entry section. Then, based on that the corresponding number of game balls have entered the special ball entry section, a specific number or more of game balls are given to the player or the number of game balls available to the player is increased by the specific number or more. Is performed. Thereby, even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry section, when the game is performed so that the game ball is supplied to the sorting means, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while keeping the game from decreasing.

Feature A28. A special ball entry section (special prize section 142) in which game balls that have been distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution section but do not enter the predetermined ball entry section enter the ball;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry section, a process for increasing the number of game balls that is given to the player or the number of game balls that can be used by the player, based on the fact that the game ball has hit the ball. The gaming machine according to feature A25 or A26, wherein the game is executed.

  According to the feature A28, the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means enter the special ball entry section even if they do not enter the predetermined ball entry section. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry section, a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be given to the player or the number of game balls usable by the player by the number of game balls or more is performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry section. Be executed. Thereby, even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry section, when the game is performed so that the game ball is supplied to the sorting means, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while keeping the game from decreasing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A28, any one or a plurality of configurations among the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature A group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  For pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry area provided in the game area, and the display of the pattern is displayed on the display device. In such a case, there is known a configuration in which a transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player when the game state becomes. Then, in the case of transition to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A specific ball entry portion (through prize winning portion 36) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
A special ball entry unit (a branch entrance 61 in the first to third embodiments, a second special figure prize winning device 34 in the fourth to fifth embodiments) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and
A first state in which game balls can enter the special entry section based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific entry section, and a second state in which entry of game balls is impossible or difficult. A switching control means (a function of executing a process during normal figure fluctuation and a process during normal power operation in the MPU 112) for performing switching control for each of:
In a gaming machine equipped with
On the upstream side of the specific ball entry section and the special ball entry section in the game area, the supplied game ball is placed in one of a plurality of types of distribution directions including a first distribution direction and a second distribution direction. Distribution means (in the first embodiment, the first distribution mechanism 71, the second distribution mechanism 72, the fourth distribution mechanism) which sequentially changes the distribution direction when the game ball is supplied. In the embodiment, a first distribution mechanism 71 is provided, and in the fifth embodiment, a third distribution mechanism 161 and a fourth distribution mechanism 162) are provided.
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. A gaming machine characterized in that a game ball is supplied to the special ball entry section in such a case.

  According to the feature B1, the special ball entry section is set to the first state on the assumption that a game ball has entered the specific ball entry section. As a result, a player expecting a game ball to enter the special ball entry unit will also pay attention to whether a game ball enters the specific ball entry unit.

  In this case, distribution means for sequentially changing the distribution direction is provided on the upstream side of the specific ball entry section and the special ball entry section when game balls are supplied, and the distribution by the distribution means is provided. When the direction is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction, the game ball is directed to the special entering ball portion. Is supplied. Thereby, it becomes possible to supply the game balls to the specific ball entry portion by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, and to the special ball entry portion. It becomes possible to supply a game ball. In addition, by appropriately designing the configuration of the distributing means, the frequency at which game balls are supplied to the specific ball entry section and the frequency at which game balls are supplied to the special ball entry section can be determined by the designer. The frequency can be set. Furthermore, it becomes possible to supply the game ball to the special ball entry section after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball was supplied to the specific ball entry section, and the game ball entered the specific ball entry section. It is possible to ensure that the game ball is supplied to the special entering ball portion in the first state when the special entering ball portion is in the first state with at least one condition that the game ball has been played. .

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distributing means, the distributing state of the distributing means makes one round.

  According to the feature B2, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distributing means, the distribution state by the distributing means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distributing means. By doing so, it is possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a certain mode.

  Feature B3. Only the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific ball entry portion, and only the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, wherein the player can enter the special ball entry section.

  According to the feature B3, only the game balls distributed by the distribution means can enter the specific ball entry section and the special ball entry section. This makes it easier to design the frequency of entering the specific ball entry section and the special ball entry section to a desired frequency.

  Feature B4. Characteristic B1 to B1 to B3 to G3, wherein a predetermined number of game balls to be supplied to the distribution unit are distributed in the second distribution direction after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

  According to the characteristic B4, the game balls supplied by the distribution unit after a predetermined number are distributed in the second distribution direction to the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit, so that the specific incoming ball is provided. It is possible to secure a period from when a game ball enters the section to when a game ball is supplied to the special entry section. With this, when the special entering ball portion is in the first state with at least one condition that the game ball enters the specific entering ball portion, the game ball is placed in the special entering ball portion in the first state. In the case where the supply is ensured, it is possible to secure a period until the special entering section is brought into the first state when the game ball enters the specific entering section.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the predetermined number is two or more.

  According to the feature B5, it is possible to secure a somewhat long period from the time when the game ball enters the specific ball entry section to the time when the game ball is supplied to the special ball entry section. With this, when the special entering ball portion is in the first state with at least one condition that the game ball enters the specific entering ball portion, the game ball is placed in the special entering ball portion in the first state. In a case where the supply is ensured, it is possible to secure a certain long period as a period until the special entering unit is brought into the first state when the game ball enters the specific entering unit. Become.

  Feature B6. Before the state of distributing the game balls in the first distribution direction is changed to the state of distributing the game balls in the second distribution direction, the distributing means may determine the first distribution direction and the second distribution direction. The gaming machine according to Feature B4 or B5, wherein the gaming balls are distributed in different distribution directions.

  According to the feature B6, using the period in which the game balls are distributed to the side different from the specific ball entry section and the special ball entry section, the special ball entry section is provided after the game ball enters the specific ball entry section. It is possible to secure a relatively long period of time until the game balls are supplied to the player.

Feature B7. An operation execution means (general-purpose display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on a game ball having entered the specific entry unit;
The switching control unit is configured to start the switching control when the switching control is performed and the pre-switching operation started based on a game ball having entered the specific ball input unit is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6.

  According to the feature B7, when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section, the operation execution means executes the pre-switching operation, and when the pre-switching operation ends, the special ball entry section enters the first state. . Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the special ball entry unit is likely to be in the first state. In addition, the manager of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the transition to the first state of the special ball entry section is normal by confirming whether or not the pre-switching operation has been performed. In this case, by providing any one of the features B4 to B6, a period from when a game ball enters the specific entry section to when a game ball is supplied to the special entry section is provided. A certain period is secured. With this, when the special entering ball portion is in the first state with at least one condition that the game ball enters the specific entering ball portion, the game ball is placed in the special entering ball portion in the first state. In a case where the supply is ensured, it is possible to secure a period during which the pre-switching operation is executed by the operation executing means before the special entering ball enters the first state.

  Feature B8. In a predetermined game state (first high probability state or second high probability state in the first to third embodiments, high frequency support mode in the fourth to fifth embodiments), the shortest When a game ball is supplied in a supply cycle, the switching is performed over a specific period that is equal to or less than a period required from a time when a game ball is supplied to the specific ball portion to a time when a game ball is supplied to the special ball portion. Means for causing the operation execution means to perform the pre-operation (the function of executing the processing of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, and the processing of steps S1211 and S1212 in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment) Function B4 in the MPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). Of the game machine.

  According to the feature B8, when the game ball distributed by the distribution means enters the specific ball entry section, the game ball distributed next to the special ball entry section by the distribution means is set in the special ball entry section. , It is possible to make the special ball entry section be in the first state.

  Feature B9. In a game state different from the predetermined game state, even when a game ball is supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle, the special ball entry section is set to the first state, and then the second ball is set to the second state. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein a gaming ball is supplied to the special ball-in section after a period until returning to the state has elapsed.

  According to the feature B9, in a game state different from the predetermined game state, even if the special ball entry section can be in the first state, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the special ball entry section. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the predetermined game state.

Feature B10. A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which a game ball having entered the special ball entry portion flows down;
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to any one of a plurality of regions including a first region (downstream of the first lead-out region 65c) and a second region (second lead-out region 65d). Guiding means (switching piece 67)
First granting means for granting the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when a game ball flows into the first area (a function of executing the processing of steps S704, S705 and S908 in the MPU 112) When,
With
The first situation where the special ball section enters the first state is a first situation in which a game ball that has entered the special ball section is guided to the first area, and a game that has entered the special ball section. A second situation in which a sphere is guided to said second region,
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (the first high probability state), the first situation or the first situation is reached in a situation where a game ball can enter the special entering section. The probability is higher than the probability of the second situation,
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (the second high probability state), the second situation or the second situation is reached in a situation where a game ball can enter the special entering section. The probability is higher than the probability of the first situation,
In the first situation, when game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means are determined. A game ball which was later supplied to the sorting means and which entered the special ball entry section was guided to the first area,
In the second situation, when a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in the predetermined supply cycle, the game ball distributed in the first allocating direction by the allocating means has a predetermined size. The game balls supplied to the allocating means after the number, and the game balls entered in the special ball entry section are guided to the second area, wherein any one of the features B4 to B9 is provided. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B10, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the special ball entry section is guided to the first area, and the game ball can enter the special ball entry section in the first game state. Is the first situation or tends to be the first situation. Further, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the special ball entry section is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the special ball entry section. Is likely to be the second situation or the second situation. Thereby, the state where the special ball entry section is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area, and the state where the special ball entry section is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area. Can easily be created.

  In this case, when game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, in the first situation, after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific ball input section, the distribution means returns to the distribution means. The supplied game balls enter the special ball entry section and are supplied to the first area, and in the second situation, are supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific ball entry section. Game balls enter the special ball entry section and are supplied to the second area. Thus, while the operation mode of the distribution means is a common mode, the game balls are supplied to the first area in the first situation and the game balls are supplied to the second area in the second situation. It becomes possible. In the first situation, the number of game balls required from the supply of game balls to the specific ball entry section to the supply of game balls to the special ball entry section is set to a common number. In the second situation, a ball is supplied and a game ball can be supplied to the second area.

Feature B11. Based on the timing at which the switching control is started, in a first period, a guiding state in which a game ball is guided to the first area is established, and in a second period, a guiding state in which a game ball is guided to the second area. A guidance control means for controlling the guidance means so as to be in a state (a function of executing steps S510, S511 and S612 to S614 in the MPU 112);
In the first situation, when a game ball is supplied to the distribution unit at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined distribution is performed on the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit. The switching is performed such that the first period is reached when the game balls supplied to the allocating means after the number and the game balls entering the special ball entry section pass the guiding position by the guiding means. Control start timing is set,
In the second situation, when a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in the predetermined supply cycle, the game ball distributed in the first allocating direction by the allocating means has a predetermined size. The switching is performed such that the second period is reached when the game balls supplied to the allocating means after the number of balls have passed through the guidance position by the guidance means, and the game balls having entered the special ball entry section. The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein a control start timing is set.

  According to the feature B11, the excellent effect as described in the above-described feature B10 can be achieved only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the special ball entry unit corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation. It becomes possible.

Feature B12. An operation execution means (general-purpose display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on a game ball having entered the specific entry unit;
The switching control unit is configured to start the switching control when the switching control is performed and the pre-switching operation started based on a game ball having entered the specific ball input unit is completed. Yes,
The gaming machine causes the operation execution unit to perform the pre-switching operation in the first situation over a period corresponding to the first situation, and in the second situation during the period corresponding to the second situation. Operation control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, the steps S1211 and S12 in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature B11, further comprising a function of executing the process of S1212).

  According to the feature B12, the excellent effect as described in the above feature B10 can be obtained only by adjusting the period during which the pre-switching operation is performed in the operation execution unit in accordance with each of the first situation and the second situation. It becomes possible.

Feature B13. First variable ball entry means (first special figure prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot or cannot be entered. 33)
Means for causing the first variable ball entry means to enter the first state based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry section (executing the processing of steps S704, S705 and S908 in the MPU 112) Function) and
With
A third distribution direction is set as a distribution direction by the distribution means,
A game ball is supplied to the first variable ball-in means when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction, wherein any one of B1 to B12 is provided. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B13, the first variable ball entry means enters the first state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry section. In this case, a player who expects the first variable ball entry means to be in the first state plays a game while expecting a game ball to enter the special ball entry section. In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. A game ball is supplied to the special ball entry section, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction, the game ball is supplied to the first variable ball entry means. Thereby, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game balls are supplied to each of the specific ball entry section, the special ball entry section, and the first variable ball entry section in a predetermined order. It is possible to do so.

  Feature B14. A game ball to be supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution unit is distributed in the first distribution direction. B13. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature B14, the game balls to be supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number are distributed in the first distribution direction to the game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution unit. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means to when the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry section.

Feature B15. When the distributing means is in a state of distributing gaming balls in the third distributing direction, the third distributing direction is required until the distributing means is in a state of distributing gaming balls in the first distributing direction. In this configuration, a special number of game balls are distributed to
When the first variable ball-in means is in the first state, the first variable ball-in means is switched to the second variable ball-in means based on the switching trigger number of game balls entering the first variable ball-in means. Means (function for executing the processing of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112),
The gaming machine according to Feature B13 or B14, wherein the special number is equal to or greater than the switching trigger number.

  According to the feature B15, when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, the distribution ball is supplied to the first variable ball entry means by the distribution means by the number of switching triggers, and then the distribution is performed. The distribution state of the means is a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific entry section. Thereby, when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball can be supplied to the specific ball entry section after the first variable ball entry means is in the second state. Thus, in the situation where the first variable ball entry means is in the second state, it becomes possible to cause a game ball to enter the specific ball entry section.

Feature B16. A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which a game ball having entered the special ball entry portion flows down;
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to any one of a plurality of regions including a first region (downstream of the first lead-out region 65c) and a second region (second lead-out region 65d). Guiding means (switching piece 67)
First variable ball entry means (first special figure prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot or cannot be entered. 33)
Second variable ball entry means (second special figure prize winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot or cannot be entered. 34)
A first assigning means for causing the first variable ball entry means to enter the first state when a game ball flows into the first area (a function of executing the processing of steps S704, S705 and S908 in the MPU 112); )When,
The second assigning means (the function of executing the processing of step S804, step S805, and step S910 in the MPU 112) for causing the second variable entering means to enter the first state when a game ball flows into the second area. )When,
With
The first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means are provided side by side in the downflow direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and are located upstream of the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means. When the provided variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game balls flowing into the aggregation area can flow down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side,
A third distribution direction is set as a distribution direction by the distribution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, wherein when the distribution direction by the distribution unit is the third distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the aggregation area.

  According to the feature B16, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball-in means becomes the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region. The second variable ball entry means is in the first state. Accordingly, the type of the variable ball-in means which is in the first state is different depending on the mode of guidance by the guidance means, and the player is informed to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage is guided. Can be raised. In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. The game ball is supplied to the special ball entry section, and the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are provided when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction. A game ball is supplied toward. Thereby, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, it is possible to supply the game balls to each of the specific ball entry section and the special ball entry section in a predetermined order. In addition, even if a game ball that has entered the special entry section is guided to either the first area or the second area, the game ball is supplied to the variable entry means corresponding to the guided area. It is possible to do.

  In particular, the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means are provided side by side in the downflow direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means is provided. When the variable ball-in means provided in is in the second state, the game balls flowing into the aggregation area flow down toward the variable ball-in means provided on the downstream side. Thereby, even if it does not have to be configured such that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are individually divided by the distribution means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can be used. It is possible to supply the game ball to the side in the first state of the means.

  Feature B17. The feature B1 is characterized in that game balls to be supplied to the distribution unit after a specific number of game balls distributed by the distribution unit in the second distribution direction are distributed in the first distribution direction. The gaming machine according to any one of B16 to B16.

  According to the feature B17, game balls supplied to the distribution unit after a specific number are distributed in the first distribution direction to game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution unit, so that special entry is performed. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the ball means to when the game ball is supplied to the specific entry section.

Feature B18. When the distributing means is in a state of distributing game balls in the second distributing direction, the distributing means is in a state of distributing game balls in the first distributing direction before the second distributing direction. Is configured to distribute a specific number of game balls to
Means for setting the special ball entry unit to the second state based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special ball unit when the special ball unit enters the first state. Function for executing the processing of steps S1701 and S1703 in
The gaming machine according to Feature B17, wherein the specific number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of opportunities.

  According to the feature B18, when the special ball entry section is in the first state, a predetermined number of game balls are supplied to the special ball entry section by the distribution section, and then the distribution section distributes the ball. The state is a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific entry section. Thus, when the special ball entry section is in the first state, the game ball can be supplied to the specific ball entry section after the special ball entry section becomes the second state. In the situation where the ball portion is in the second state, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entry portion.

  Feature B19. The time required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where a game ball can enter the specific ball entry portion from a predetermined height position is the distribution time. Means so that the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the means is longer than a period required from the predetermined height position to reach a position where it can enter the special ball entry section. The gaming machine according to Feature B17 or B18, wherein a path configuration from a distributing unit to the specific ball entry unit and a path configuration from the distributing unit to the special ball entry unit are set.

  According to the feature B19, the period required for the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game ball can enter the specific entering portion from the predetermined height position is Since the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means is set to be longer than a period required until the game ball reaches a position where it can enter the special ball entry section from a predetermined height position, It is possible to secure a long period of time from when a game ball enters the special ball entry section to when the game ball reaches the specific ball entry section. Thereby, when the special ball entry section is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry section after the special ball entry section becomes the second state based on the ball entering the special ball entry section. It is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entry section in a situation where the special ball entry section is in the second state. In addition, since the above-described ball entry period is set by the path configuration from the distribution unit to the specific ball entry unit and the path configuration from the distribution unit to the special ball entry unit, the game ball is distributed by the distribution unit. It is possible to produce the above-described effects while keeping the distribution mode constant.

Feature B20. A specific guidance path (fourth guidance rail 156) for guiding the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to the specific ball entry part;
A predetermined guide path portion (second guide rail 153) for guiding the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to the special ball entry portion;
With
The passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the specific ball entry portion in the specific guidance passage portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the special ball entry portion in the predetermined guidance passage portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B17 to B19, which is set to be large.

  According to the feature B20, the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the specific guidance passage portion to the specific ball entry portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the predetermined guidance passage portion to the special ball entry portion. By setting, the period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game balls can enter the specific ball entry section from the predetermined height position is allocated. The period required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game balls can enter the special ball entry section from the predetermined height position can be made longer. Thereby, when the special ball entry section is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry section after the special ball entry section becomes the second state based on the ball entering the special ball entry section. It is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entry section in a situation where the special ball entry section is in the second state. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-described operation and effect only by adjusting the passage length of the specific guidance passage portion and the predetermined guidance passage portion.

  Feature B21. The gaming machine according to Feature B19 or B20, wherein the specific number is one.

  According to the feature B21, the game balls supplied to the special ball entry unit next to the game balls supplied toward the special ball entry unit are supplied to the specific ball entry unit. Thus, it is possible to prevent a useless game ball from being generated after the game ball is supplied to the special ball entry section and before the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry section. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature B19 or B20, the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific ball portion from a predetermined height position. The time required to reach the position is the time required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game balls can enter the special ball entry section from the predetermined height position. It is possible to make it longer.

Feature B22. The second distribution direction is a direction directed vertically downward from the distribution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B21, wherein the first distribution direction is a direction directed from the distribution unit to a side different from a vertically lower side.

  According to the feature B22, since the special ball entry portion is provided at the position where the game balls distributed vertically downward by the sorting means are supplied, the ball entry can be triggered by the ball entry into the specific ball entry portion. It becomes possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the special ball entry section. As a result, the movement of the game ball distributed toward the special ball entry portion by the sorting means is in progress even though the special ball entry portion is in the first state triggered by the ball entry into the specific ball entry portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such an event that the special ball entry section enters the second state before the ball enters the special ball entry section and the ball enters the special ball entry section.

Feature B23. An acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S1101 in the MPU 112) for acquiring predetermined information based on a game ball having entered the special ball entry unit;
A game turn control unit (step S1006 in the MPU 112) that controls the game turn execution unit (second special figure display unit 45b) so that the game turn operation is executed based on the acquisition of the predetermined information by the acquisition unit. To execute the process of step S1008);
With
The game times control means,
The game operation is executed over a first operation period (fixed short period) shorter than the shortest entry period when a game ball enters the special entry section. 1 control means (a function of executing the process of step S1905 in the MPU 112);
A second control unit (a function of executing the process of step S1906 in the MPU 112) that causes the game repetition operation to be executed over a second operation period (fixed long period) equal to or longer than the shortest ball entry cycle;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B22, comprising:

  According to the feature B23, in a situation in which the game replay operation is performed over the first operation period, the game is performed in a period shorter than the shortest ball entry cycle in the case where the game ball enters the special ball entry unit. Since the game recycle operation is completed, it is difficult to generate an event that predetermined information is not obtained even though a game ball has entered the special ball entry unit. On the other hand, in the situation where the game recycle operation is performed over the second operation period, the game recycle operation is performed over a period equal to or longer than the shortest ball entry cycle when the game ball enters the special ball entry section. Since the game operation continues, it is possible to cause a situation in which the player pays attention to the game round operation.

  Feature B24. The gaming machine according to Feature B23, wherein the first operation period is only one type.

  According to the feature B24, since the first operation period is only one type, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the operation period.

Feature B25. A predetermined information storage unit (second special figure reservation area 134) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit, an application determination unit (steps S1103 and S1103 in the MPU 112) that performs an application determination as to whether the predetermined information is the application information corresponding to the application of the privilege. Function for executing the processing of S1105);
With
The game replay control means is configured to execute the game replay operation when the provision determination is performed by the provision determination means,
The first control unit is configured to store the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage unit separately from the predetermined information that triggers execution of the game turn operation. The gaming machine according to Feature B23 or B24, wherein when the information is used to execute the game replay operation, the game replay operation is performed over the first operation period. .

  According to the feature B25, in a situation where a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means, when the game replay operation is performed with the predetermined information that does not correspond to the assignment correspondence information as an execution trigger, a special ball entry is performed. The game replay operation is executed in a period shorter than the shortest ball entry cycle when a game ball enters the club. This reduces the possibility that a new game ball may enter the special ball entry section even though a predetermined number of predetermined information has already been stored in the predetermined information storage means. Therefore, an event that predetermined information is not obtained even when a game ball enters the special ball entry unit is less likely to occur.

Feature B26. A predetermined information storage unit (second special figure reservation area 134) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
The game turn control means is configured to execute the game turn operation when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B23 to B25, wherein the second operation period is a period that is equal to or longer than a product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number.

  According to the feature B26, when the game replay operation is performed over the second operation period, a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means in a situation where the game replay operation is being performed. It is possible to do so. This makes it possible to cause a situation where a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

  Feature B27. The second operation period is a period that is equal to or longer than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number, and is a period that is less than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and a number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to Feature B26, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

  According to the feature B27, if the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means and the predetermined information is executed and the game replay operation is executed over the second operation period, the game replay operation is performed. The predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information can be stored in the predetermined information storage means in a situation where the game operation is being executed, while the special ball entry unit is in a situation where the game round operation is being executed. It is possible to prevent more than a predetermined number of game balls from entering.

  Feature B28. The second control means is configured to execute the game replay operation in a situation in which the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information which is an execution trigger of the game replay operation. The gaming machine according to Feature B26 or B27, wherein the game replay operation is performed over the second operation period.

  According to the feature B28, in the case where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means and the predetermined information is executed and the game replay operation is executed, the game replay operation is performed with the shortest ball entry. It is executed over a second operation period that is a period equal to or longer than the product of the cycle and the predetermined number. Thereby, in a case where the predetermined information storage means does not store the predetermined information that is not the execution target of the game replay operation, the predetermined information storage means stores the predetermined number of predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means. It is possible to do.

Feature B29. A predetermined information storage unit (second special figure reservation area 134) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit, an application determination unit (steps S1103 and S1103 in the MPU 112) that performs an application determination as to whether the predetermined information is the application information corresponding to the application of the privilege. Function for executing the processing of S1105);
With
The game replay control means is configured to execute the game replay operation when the provision determination is performed by the provision determination means,
The first control unit is configured to store the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage unit separately from the predetermined information that triggers execution of the game turn operation. When performing the game replay operation triggered by the information, the game replay operation is performed over the first operation period,
The second control means is configured to execute the game replay operation in a situation in which the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information which is an execution trigger of the game replay operation. The game turning operation is performed over the second operation period,
When a game ball is supplied to the distribution means in a shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and the game replay operation triggered by the predetermined information that does not correspond to the assignment corresponding information is repeatedly executed, Until the game repetition operation is executed a predetermined number of times, the game repetition operation in the first operation period is executed, and in the next execution time, the game repetition operation in the second operation period is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B23 to B28, wherein the first operation period and the second operation period are set.

  According to the feature B29, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle, and the game turning operation triggered by the predetermined information that does not correspond to the provision correspondence information is repeatedly executed. In such a case, a situation occurs in which the game operation for the first operation period is executed a predetermined number of times, and then the game operation for the second operation period is executed once. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game replay operation is enhanced in order to prevent a situation in which the predetermined information is not obtained despite the occurrence of a ball entry to the special ball entry section, the game replay operation is performed. Can be periodically generated for a certain period of time, and it is possible to make the effect execution mode preferable.

  Feature B30. A means for executing a predetermined effect when the game replay operation is executed over the second operation period (a function of executing the processing of steps S2105 to S2110 in the MPU 123). The gaming machine according to Feature B29.

  According to the feature B30, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game round operation is increased in order to prevent a situation in which predetermined information is not obtained despite the occurrence of a ball entering the special ball entry section, Thus, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

Feature B31. When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
The specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B30, wherein a process for increasing the number of gaming balls by at least the specific number can be executed.

  According to the feature B31, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distributing means, the distribution state by the distributing means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distributing means. By doing so, it is possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a certain mode. In this case, a specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls to a specific number or more may be executed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a game is played such that game balls are supplied to the distribution means, while the number of game balls that can be used by the player is not substantially reduced.

  Feature B32. In the case where each of the game balls distributed by the allocating means causes a ball to enter the special ball-in section before the allocating state makes one round, the allocating means is made until the allocating state makes one round. A process for increasing the number of game balls that are given to the player or the number of game balls usable by the player based on the winning by at least a part of each of the game balls sorted by the game ball. The gaming machine according to feature B31, wherein the game is executed.

  According to the feature B32, when a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in a state in which a ball can enter the special sphere, the ball is distributed by the allocating means until the allocating state makes one round. Based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball, a process for giving a player a specific number or more of game balls or increasing the number of game balls available to the player by a specific number or more is executed. Accordingly, when a game is performed so that game balls are supplied to the distribution means in a state where a ball can enter the special ball entry section, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play the game without decreasing the game.

Feature B33. If the game ball distributed by the distributing means does not cause a ball to enter the special ball entry section by one round of the distribution state, a special game ball in which the game ball distributed by the distributing means enters the ball. It has a ball entry section (special prize section 142),
Based on that a corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means before the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls are played. The gaming machine according to Feature B31 or B32, wherein processing for increasing the number of game balls given to the player or usable by the player by the specific number or more is executed.

  According to the feature B33, even when the ball does not enter the special ball entry section, the game ball distributed by the sorting means enters the special ball entry section. Then, based on that the corresponding number of game balls have entered the special ball entry section, a specific number or more of game balls are given to the player or the number of game balls available to the player is increased by the specific number or more. Is performed. Thereby, even if the ball does not enter the special ball entry section, when the game is performed so that the game ball is supplied to the sorting means, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while keeping the game from decreasing.

Feature B34. A special ball entry unit (special prize unit 142) in which game balls that are sorted in the second distribution direction by the distribution unit but do not enter the special ball entry unit enter;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry section, a process for increasing the number of game balls that is given to the player or the number of game balls that can be used by the player, based on the fact that the game ball has hit the ball. The gaming machine according to feature B31 or B32, wherein the game is executed.

  According to the feature B34, the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means enter the special ball entry section even if they do not enter the special ball entry section. Then, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry section, a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be given to the player or the number of game balls available to the player by the player or more is performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry section. Be executed. Thereby, even if the ball does not enter the special ball entry section, when the game is performed so that the game ball is supplied to the sorting means, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while keeping the game from decreasing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B34, any one or more of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature B group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  For pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry area provided in the game area, and the display of the pattern is displayed on the display device. In such a case, there is known a configuration in which a transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player when the game state becomes. Then, in the case of transition to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to make the flow form of the game balls in the game area preferable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A first variable switchably provided between a first state in which game balls flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot or cannot be entered. Ball entry means (first special figure prize winning device 33),
A second variable ball-in means (the second variable ball-in means provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot or cannot be entered. 2 special map winning device 34),
A lottery process is performed based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the first variable ball entry unit, and a lottery process is performed based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the second variable ball entry unit. And a lottery process executed based on a game ball having entered the first variable ball entry means and a lottery executed based on a game ball having entered the second variable ball entry means. Lottery executing means (function of executing the processing of steps S1001, S1102, and S1103 in the MPU 112) in which the execution mode of the lottery processing differs from the processing;
A predetermined ball entry portion (branch entrance 61) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which a game ball having entered the predetermined ball input portion flows down;
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to any one of a plurality of regions including a first region (downstream of the first lead-out region 65c) and a second region (second lead-out region 65d). Guiding means (switching piece 67)
A first assigning means (steps S704, S705 and S705 in the MPU 112) for causing the first variable ball entry means to enter the first state when a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area. A function of executing the processing of S908);
Second providing means (steps S804, S805 and step S805 in the MPU 112) for causing the second variable ball-in means to enter the first state when a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area. A function of executing the process of S910);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature C1, the lottery process is executed based on the game ball having entered the first variable ball entry means, and the lottery process is performed based on the game ball having entered the second variable ball entry means. Be executed. The execution mode of the lottery process differs between the former lottery process and the latter lottery process. This makes it possible to diversify the execution timing of the lottery process and to diversify the execution mode of the lottery process in accordance with the execution timing of the lottery process.

  In this case, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region, the first variable ball-entering means enters the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region, the second variable ball-in means enters the second region. The variable ball entry means is in the first state. Accordingly, the type of the variable ball-in means which is in the first state is different depending on the mode of guidance by the guidance means, and the player is informed to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage is guided. Can be raised.

  Feature C2. In the case where the lottery process is executed based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means, the entry of a game ball into the first variable ball entry means occurs. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the gaming machine is more advantageous to the player than when the lottery process is executed based on the above.

  According to the feature C2, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the second variable ball entry means than the game ball enters the first variable ball entry means. Thereby, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section, the player expects that the game ball is guided to the second area, and the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage section is in any area. It is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the player is guided.

Feature C3. When the game state is the first game state (first high probability state), the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or flows into the first region is determined by the first region. Is higher than the probability of flowing into different areas,
When the game state is the second game state (the second high probability state), the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region or flows into the second region is in the first region. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration higher than the probability of flowing.

  According to the feature C3, in the first game state, the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or flows into the first region increases, while the predetermined ball portion moves in the second game state. The probability that the flowing game ball flows into the second region or flows into the second region is increased. As a result, the lottery process is easily executed when a game ball enters the first variable ball entry unit, and the lottery process is performed when a game ball enters the second variable ball entry unit. Can be easily created.

Feature C4. Switching control means (switching the normal figure variation in the MPU 112) for controlling the predetermined ball entry portion to switch between a first state in which game balls can be entered and a second state in which game balls cannot be entered. Function to execute the middle process and the process during the normal power operation)
As the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry part is guided to the first area, and a game entering the predetermined ball entry part A second situation in which a sphere is guided to said second region,
In the first gaming state, the probability that the first situation or the first situation becomes the first situation in a situation where the game ball can enter the predetermined entering section is higher than the probability that the second situation occurs. Is also a high configuration,
In the second game state, the probability that the second situation or the second situation will be the first situation is greater than the probability that the second situation or the second situation is achieved in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined entering section. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the gaming machine also has a high configuration.

  According to the feature C4, it is impossible or difficult for the predetermined ball entry section to enter a game ball in the second state, and the game ball can enter in the first state. As a result, a player expecting a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry unit will pay attention to whether the predetermined ball entry unit is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. The situation is the first situation or is likely to be the first situation. In the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. Is likely to be the second situation or the second situation. Thereby, the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area, and the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area Can easily be created.

Feature C5. On the upstream side of the predetermined ball entry section, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means in the game area, a plurality of game balls including a predetermined distribution direction and a specific distribution direction are provided. A distribution means (first distribution mechanism 71, second distribution mechanism 72) for sequentially distributing the game balls in one of the distribution directions and sequentially changing the distribution direction when a game ball is supplied. Prepare
The first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means are provided side by side in the downflow direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and are located upstream of the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means. When the provided variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game balls flowing into the aggregation area can flow down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entry portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction, The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein a game ball is supplied toward the aggregation area.

  According to the feature C5, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the game ball is supplied to the predetermined ball entry portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction. The game ball is supplied to the integrated area provided with the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. Thereby, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, it becomes possible to supply the game balls to the predetermined ball input section in a predetermined order, It is possible to supply the game balls to the variable ball-in means corresponding to the guided area, regardless of whether the game ball entered into the area is guided to any of the first area and the second area.

  In particular, the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means are provided side by side in the downflow direction of the game ball in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means is provided. When the variable ball-in means provided in is in the second state, the game balls flowing into the aggregation area flow down toward the variable ball-in means provided on the downstream side. Thereby, even if it does not have to be configured such that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are individually divided by the distribution means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can be used. It is possible to supply the game ball to the side in the first state of the means.

  Feature C6. The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein, when a specific number of gaming balls are supplied to the distribution unit, the distribution state of the distribution unit makes one round.

  According to the feature C6, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distributing means, the distribution state by the distributing means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distributing means. By doing so, it is possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a certain mode.

  Feature C7. Only the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the predetermined ball entry section, and only the game balls distributed in the specific distribution direction by the distribution means are The gaming machine according to feature C5 or C6, wherein a ball can enter the side of the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means that is in the first state.

  According to the feature C7, only the game balls distributed by the distribution unit can enter the predetermined ball entry unit, the first variable ball entry unit, and the second variable ball entry unit. This makes it easier to design the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry section, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to a desired frequency.

  Feature C8. Game balls to be supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution unit are distributed in the specific distribution direction. Features C5 to C7. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature C8, the game balls to be supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number are distributed in the specific distribution direction to the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution unit, so that the predetermined ball entry unit It is possible to secure a period from when a game ball enters the game ball to when the game ball is supplied to the integrated area of the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means.

Feature C9. Switching control means (switching the normal figure variation in the MPU 112) for controlling the predetermined ball entry portion to switch between a first state in which game balls can be entered and a second state in which game balls cannot be entered. Function to execute the middle process and the process during the normal power operation)
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on a game ball having entered a specific ball entry portion (through winning portion 36),
Another distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the different distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry section,
When the distribution means is in a state of distributing game balls in the specific distribution direction, a special number in the specific distribution direction is required until the distribution means is in a state of distributing game balls in the separate distribution direction. It is a configuration where game balls of
The gaming machine is
When the first variable ball entry means enters the first state when a game ball flows into the first area, the switching variable number of game balls enters the first variable ball entry means. Means for setting the first variable ball entry means to the second state based on the (a function of executing the processing of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112);
When the second variable ball entry means enters the first state when the game ball flows into the second area, the switching variable number of game balls enters the second variable ball entry means. Means for setting the second variable pitching means to the second state based on the (the function of executing the processing of steps S807 to S810 in the MPU 112);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C8, wherein the special number is equal to or greater than the switching trigger number.

  According to the feature C9, the predetermined entering ball portion is set to the first state on the assumption that a game ball has entered the specific entering ball portion. As a result, a player expecting a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry unit will also pay attention to whether a game ball enters the specific ball entry unit. Also, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is a different distribution direction, a game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball is entered. The game ball is supplied to the section, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction, the game ball is supplied to the aggregation area. Thus, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, it is possible to sequentially supply the game balls to the respective ball entry points.

  In the above configuration, when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, the number of switching balls is supplied to the first variable ball entry means by the distributing means after the distributing means switches the game balls, and then the distribution of the distributing means is performed. When the minute state is a state in which game balls are distributed toward the specific ball-entering section, and when the second variable ball-in means is in the first state, the number of switching triggers by the distribution means toward the second variable ball-in means is changed. After the game balls are supplied, the distribution state of the distribution means becomes a state of distributing the game balls toward the specific ball entry section. Thus, when the first variable ball-in means or the second variable ball-in means is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball-in section after the variable ball-in means is in the second state. It is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entry section in a situation where the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are in the second state.

Feature C10. Switching control means (switching the normal figure variation in the MPU 112) for controlling the predetermined ball entry portion to switch between a first state in which game balls can be entered and a second state in which game balls cannot be entered. Function to execute the middle process and the process during the normal power operation)
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on a game ball having entered a specific ball entry portion (through winning portion 36),
Another distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the different distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry section,
As the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state, a first situation in which a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry part is guided to the first area, and a game entering the predetermined ball entry part A second situation in which a sphere is guided to said second region,
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (the first high probability state), the first situation or the first situation is reached in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. The probability is higher than the probability of the second situation,
When the game state is the second game state (the second high probability state), the second state or the second state is set in a state in which a game ball can enter the predetermined entry section. The probability is higher than the probability of the first situation,
In the first situation, when a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in a predetermined supply cycle, the game ball distributed in the different distribution direction by the allocating means is returned after the predetermined number of game balls. A game ball that has been supplied to the allocating means and that has entered the predetermined entry portion is guided to the first area,
In the second situation, when game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means is determined. The game ball according to any one of features C5 to C9, wherein a game ball that has been supplied to the distribution unit later and that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion is guided to the second region. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C10, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. Is the first situation or tends to be the first situation. In the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry section is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. Is likely to be the second situation or the second situation. Thereby, the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first area, and the situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area Can easily be created.

  In this case, when game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, in the first situation, after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific ball input section, the distribution means returns to the distribution means. The supplied game balls enter the predetermined ball entry section and are supplied to the first area, and in the second situation, are supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific ball entry section. Game balls enter the predetermined ball entry section and are supplied to the second area. Thus, while the operation mode of the distribution means is a common mode, the game balls are supplied to the first area in the first situation and the game balls are supplied to the second area in the second situation. It becomes possible. In the first situation, the number of game balls required from the supply of the game ball to the specific ball entry section to the supply of the game ball to the predetermined ball entry section is set to a common number. In the second situation, a ball is supplied and a game ball can be supplied to the second area.

Feature C11. Based on the timing at which the switching control is started, in a first period, a guiding state in which a game ball is guided to the first area is established, and in a second period, a guiding state in which a game ball is guided to the second area. A guidance control means for controlling the guidance means so as to be in a state (a function of executing steps S510, S511 and S612 to S614 in the MPU 112);
In the first situation, when game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means are determined. The switching control is performed so that the first period is reached when a game ball that has been supplied to the allocating unit and that has entered the predetermined ball entry unit passes through a guidance position provided by the guidance unit. Start timing is set,
In the second situation, when game balls are supplied to the distribution means at the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means are determined. The switching control is performed so that the second period is reached when a game ball that has been supplied to the distribution unit later and that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion passes through a guidance position provided by the guidance unit. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein a start timing of the game is set.

  According to the feature C11, the excellent effect as described in the above feature C10 can be obtained only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the predetermined ball entry portion corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation. It becomes possible.

Feature C12. An operation execution means (general-purpose display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on a game ball having entered the specific entry unit;
The switching control unit is configured to start the switching control when the switching control is performed and the pre-switching operation started based on a game ball having entered the specific ball input unit is completed. Yes,
The gaming machine causes the operation execution unit to perform the pre-switching operation in the first situation over a period corresponding to the first situation, and in the second situation during the period corresponding to the second situation. Operation control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, the steps S1211 and S12 in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature C11, further comprising a function of executing the process of S1212).

  According to the feature C12, the excellent effect as described in the feature C10 can be obtained only by adjusting the period during which the pre-switching operation is performed in the operation execution unit in accordance with each of the first situation and the second situation. It becomes possible.

Feature C13. When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
The specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C12, wherein a process for increasing the number of gaming balls by at least the specific number can be executed.

  According to the feature C13, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distributing means, the distribution state by the distributing means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distributing means. By doing so, it is possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a certain mode. In this case, a specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls to a specific number or more may be executed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a game is played such that game balls are supplied to the distribution means, while the number of game balls that can be used by the player is not substantially reduced.

  Feature C14. In the case where each of the game balls distributed by the allocating means causes a ball to enter the predetermined ball-entering portion before the allocating state makes one lap, the allocating means is provided until the allocating state makes one lap. A process for increasing the number of game balls that are given to the player or the number of game balls usable by the player based on the winning by at least a part of the game balls sorted by the game ball. Is executed, the gaming machine according to feature C13.

  According to the feature C14, when a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in a state where a ball can enter the predetermined ball input portion, the ball is distributed by the allocating means until the allocating state makes one round. Based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball, a process for giving a player a specific number or more of game balls or increasing the number of game balls available to the player by a specific number or more is executed. Thereby, when the game is performed such that the game ball is supplied to the allocating means in a state where the ball can enter the predetermined ball input section, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game without decreasing the game.

Feature C15. When the game ball distributed by the distributing means does not enter the predetermined entering ball portion by one round of the distribution state, the game ball distributed by the distributing means enters the special ball. It has a ball entry section (special prize section 142),
Based on that a corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means before the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls are played. The gaming machine according to feature C13 or C14, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls given to the player or usable by the player by the specific number or more is executed.

  According to the feature C15, even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry section, the game ball distributed by the sorting means enters the special ball entry section. Then, based on that the corresponding number of game balls have entered the special ball entry section, a specific number or more of game balls are given to the player or the number of game balls available to the player is increased by the specific number or more. Is performed. Thereby, even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry section, when the game is performed so that the game ball is supplied to the sorting means, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while keeping the game from decreasing.

Feature C16. A special ball entry section (special prize section 142) in which game balls that have been distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means but do not enter the predetermined ball entry section enter;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry section, a process for increasing the number of game balls that is given to the player or the number of game balls that can be used by the player, based on the fact that the game ball has hit the ball. Is executed, the gaming machine according to feature C13 or C14.

  According to the feature C16, the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means enter the special ball entry section even if they do not enter the predetermined ball entry section. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry section, a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be given to the player or the number of game balls usable by the player by the number of game balls or more is performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry section. Be executed. Thereby, even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry section, when the game is performed so that the game ball is supplied to the sorting means, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while keeping the game from decreasing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C16, one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature C group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  For pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry area provided in the game area, and the display of the pattern is displayed on the display device. In such a case, there is known a configuration in which a transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player when the game state becomes. Then, in the case of transition to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. Distribution means for distributing the game balls supplied in the game area to one of a plurality of types of distribution directions, and sequentially changing the distribution direction in response to the supply of the game balls (first embodiment The first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment, and the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 in the fifth embodiment). ,
When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
The specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. A gaming machine capable of executing a process for increasing the number of game balls by a specific number or more.

  According to the feature D1, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game balls are sequentially supplied to the respective regions corresponding to the distribution directions of the distribution means. In addition, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distributing means, the distribution state by the distributing means makes one round. Therefore, by supplying the game balls to the distributing means, It is possible to distribute the game balls repeatedly in a certain mode. In this case, a specified number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls to a specific number or more may be executed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a game is played such that game balls are supplied to the distribution means, while the number of game balls that can be used by the player is not substantially reduced.

Feature D2. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball entry portion (the branch entrance 61 in the first and third embodiments, the branch entrance 61 in the fourth and fifth embodiments). The game balls are supplied to the second special figure prize winning device 34),
When the game ball distributed by the allocating means causes the entering ball to enter the predetermined entering portion before the allocating state makes one lap, the allocating means causes the ball to enter the predetermined entering part by one lap until the allocating state makes one lap. Based on the winning of at least a part of each of the sorted game balls, a process for increasing the number of game balls that are given to the player by the specific number or more or the number of game balls usable by the player by the specific number or more is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, which is executed.

  According to the feature D2, when a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in a state where a ball can enter the predetermined ball input portion, the ball is distributed by the allocating means until the allocating state makes one round. Based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball, a process for giving a player a specific number or more of game balls or increasing the number of game balls available to the player by a specific number or more is executed. Thereby, when the game is performed such that the game ball is supplied to the allocating means in a state where the ball can enter the predetermined ball input section, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game without decreasing the game.

Feature D3. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball entry portion (the branch entrance 61 in the first and third embodiments, the branch entrance 61 in the fourth and fifth embodiments). The game balls are supplied to the second special figure prize winning device 34),
When the game ball distributed by the distributing means does not enter the predetermined entering ball portion by one round of the distribution state, the game ball distributed by the distributing means enters the special ball. A winning section (special winning section 142 in the third embodiment, a special winning section 155 in the fourth and fifth embodiments),
Based on that a corresponding number of game balls among the game balls distributed by the distribution means before the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls are played. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls given to the player or usable by the player by the specific number or more is executed.

  According to the feature D3, even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry section, the game ball distributed by the sorting means enters the special ball entry section. Then, based on that the corresponding number of game balls have entered the special ball entry section, a specific number or more of game balls are given to the player or the number of game balls available to the player is increased by the specific number or more. Is performed. Thereby, even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry section, when the game is performed so that the game ball is supplied to the sorting means, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while keeping the game from decreasing.

Feature D4. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the predetermined ball entry portion (the branch entrance 61 in the first and third embodiments, the branch entrance 61 in the fourth and fifth embodiments). The game balls are supplied to the second special figure prize winning device 34),
A special ball entry unit in which game balls that have been distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution unit but do not enter the predetermined ball entry unit enter (in the third embodiment, the special winning unit 142, the fourth embodiment). In the embodiment and the fifth embodiment, a special winning section 155) is provided,
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry section, a process for increasing the number of game balls that is given to the player or the number of game balls that can be used by the player, based on the fact that the game ball has hit the ball. Is executed, the gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

  According to the feature D4, the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means enter the special ball entry section even if they do not enter the predetermined ball entry section. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry section, a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be given to the player or the number of game balls usable by the player by the number of game balls or more is performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry section. Be executed. Thereby, even when the ball does not enter the predetermined ball entry section, when the game is performed so that the game ball is supplied to the sorting means, the number of game balls available to the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while keeping the game from decreasing.

Feature D5. A special ball entry means (special electric winning device 35) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls can be entered and a second state in which game balls cannot be entered or difficult,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the distribution unit is provided downstream of the special ball entry unit in the downflow direction of the game ball.

  According to the feature D5, game balls that have been supplied to the special ball entry means but have not entered the special ball entry means are supplied to the distribution means, and a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means. Based on a prize by at least a part of each of the game balls distributed by the distributing means until the distribution state of the distributing means is supplied and the distribution state of the distributing means makes one round, a certain number or more of the gaming balls are provided to the player. Processing for increasing the number of game balls that can be given or usable by the player by a specific number or more may be executed. Thus, it is possible to generate a situation in which a game is played such that the game balls are supplied to the special ball entry means without substantially reducing the number of game balls available to the player. .

  Feature D6. A distribution guiding means (a guiding unit in the third embodiment) for guiding the game balls, which are supplied to the special ball inputting means and which have not entered the special balling means, to the distribution means; 141, the guiding machine 151 in the fourth embodiment, and the guiding machine 163) in the fifth embodiment.

  According to the feature D6, it is possible to surely supply the game balls supplied to the special ball entry means and the game balls not entering the special ball entry means to the distribution means. It becomes.

  Feature D7. Means for shifting the game state to a special game state in which the special ball entry means is repeatedly switched between the first state and the second state based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery processing is a winning result (MPU112) The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, further comprising: a function of executing the process of step S1009 in (1).

  According to the feature D7, even if a game ball supplied to the special ball entry unit in the special game state does not enter the special ball entry unit, the game ball is supplied to the distribution unit. Then, based on a prize by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means and the distribution state of the distribution means makes one round, More than a specified number of game balls can be given to the player, or processing for increasing the number of game balls available to the player by the specified number or more can be executed. As a result, even if game balls are supplied to the special ball entry means in the special game state, but the game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the number of game balls is substantially reduced by that amount. It is possible to avoid.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D7, any one or a plurality of configurations among the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A specific ball entry portion (through prize winning portion 36) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
A predetermined ball entry portion into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter (a branch entrance 61 in the first and third embodiments, a second special figure prize in the fourth and fifth embodiments) Device 34);
Any one of a plurality of types of distribution directions including a first distribution direction and a second distribution direction, in which the supplied game ball is provided on the upstream side of the specific ball entry portion and the predetermined ball entry portion in the game area. Distribution means (first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment) for sequentially changing the distribution direction when game balls are supplied, and
With
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. In such a case, a game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entry section,
The time required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where a game ball can enter the specific ball entry portion from a predetermined height position is the distribution time. Means that the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the means is longer than a period required from the predetermined height position to reach a position where the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion. A gaming machine, wherein a path configuration from a distributing unit to the specific ball entry unit and a path configuration from the distribution unit to the predetermined ball entry unit are set.

  According to the feature E1, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game balls are sequentially supplied to the respective regions corresponding to the distribution directions of the distribution means. In this case, the period required for the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the game ball can enter the specific ball entry portion from the predetermined height position is more distributed. The game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the means is set longer than a period required until the game ball reaches a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion from the predetermined height position. It is possible to secure a long period of time required from when the game ball enters the ball portion to when the game ball reaches the specific ball entry portion. In addition, since the above-described ball entry period is set by the path configuration from the distribution means to the specific ball entry part and the path configuration from the distribution means to the predetermined ball entry part, the game ball is distributed by the distribution means. It is possible to produce the above-described effects while keeping the distribution mode constant.

Feature E2. A specific guidance path (fourth guidance rail 156) for guiding the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to the specific ball entry part;
A predetermined guide path (second guide rail 153) for guiding the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to the predetermined ball input section;
With
A passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the specific ball entry portion in the specific guidance passage portion is larger than a path length dimension from the predetermined height position to the predetermined ball entry portion in the predetermined guidance passage portion. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the gaming machine is set large.

  According to the feature E2, the passage length from the predetermined height position to the specific ball entry portion in the specific guidance passage portion is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the predetermined ball entry portion in the predetermined guidance passage portion. By setting, the period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game balls can enter the specific ball entry section from the predetermined height position is allocated. The period required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the game balls can enter the predetermined ball entry portion from the predetermined height position can be made longer. Thereby, when the predetermined ball entry part is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry part after the predetermined ball entry part becomes the second state based on the ball entry into the predetermined ball entry part. It is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entry section in a situation where the predetermined ball entry section is in the second state. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-described operation and effect only by adjusting the passage length of the specific guidance passage portion and the predetermined guidance passage portion.

  Feature E3. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game ball to be supplied to said distributing means is distributed to said first distributing means in the first distributing direction by one after a gaming ball distributed in said second distributing direction by said distributing means. The gaming machine according to E2.

  According to the feature E3, the game ball supplied to the predetermined ball input unit next to the game ball supplied toward the predetermined ball input unit is supplied to the specific ball input unit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the useless game balls from being generated after the game balls are supplied to the predetermined ball entry section and before the game balls are supplied to the specific ball entry section. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E1, the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means is positioned at a position where it can enter the specific ball portion from the predetermined height position. The period required to reach is longer than the period required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the game balls can enter the predetermined ball entry portion from the predetermined height position. It can be longer.

Feature E4. The second distribution direction is a direction directed vertically downward from the distribution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the first distribution direction is a direction directed from the distribution unit to a side different from the vertically downward direction.

  According to the feature E4, the predetermined ball input portion is provided at the position where the game balls distributed vertically downward by the distribution means are supplied, and the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means are provided. Since the time required to reach the predetermined ball entry section is set short, it is possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the predetermined ball entry section.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E4, one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the feature D group and the feature E group invention, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  For pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry area provided in the game area, and the display of the pattern is displayed on the display device. In such a case, there is known a configuration in which a transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player when the game state becomes. Then, in the case of transition to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to make the flow form of the game balls in the game area preferable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic F group>
Feature F1. A special ball entry section (second special figure prize winning device 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
An acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S1101 in the MPU 112) for acquiring predetermined information based on a game ball having entered the special ball entry unit;
A predetermined information storage unit (second special figure reservation area 134) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit, an application determination unit (steps S1103 and S1103 in the MPU 112) that performs an application determination as to whether the predetermined information is the application information corresponding to the application of the privilege. Function for executing the processing of S1105);
A game turn control unit (in the MPU 112) that controls the game turn execution unit (second special figure display unit 45b) so that a game turn operation is executed in response to the execution of the above-described assignment determination by the assignment determination unit. Function for executing the processing of steps S1006 to S1008);
With
The game times control means,
In the situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that is an execution trigger of the game replay operation, the predetermined information that does not correspond to the assignment corresponding information is an execution trigger. When performing the game recycle operation, the game recycle operation is performed over a first operation period (fixed short period) shorter than the shortest ball entry cycle when a game ball enters the special ball entry section. A first control unit (a function of executing the process of step S1905 in the MPU 112) for executing the operation;
When performing the game replay operation in a situation where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that is an execution trigger of the game replay operation, the shortest ball entry cycle or more A second control unit (a function of executing the processing of step S1906 in the MPU 112) that causes the game replay operation to be executed over a second operation period (fixed long period);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature F1, in a situation where a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means, when the game replay operation is executed with the predetermined information that does not correspond to the assignment correspondence information as an execution trigger, a special ball entry is performed. The game replay operation is executed in a period shorter than the shortest ball entry cycle when a game ball enters the club. This reduces the possibility that a new game ball may enter the special ball entry section even though a predetermined number of predetermined information has already been stored in the predetermined information storage means. Therefore, an event that predetermined information is not obtained even when a game ball enters the special ball entry unit is less likely to occur. On the other hand, in the case where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means and the predetermined information is executed and the game replay operation is performed, the game replay operation is performed when the game recycle operation is longer than the shortest ball entry cycle. Performed over a period of time. Thus, in a case where the predetermined information storage unit does not store the predetermined information that is not the execution target of the game turning operation, the second information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit. It becomes possible.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the first operation period is only one type.

  According to the feature F2, since only one type of the first operation period is used, the storage capacity for storing the operation period can be reduced.

  Feature F3. The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2, wherein the second operation period is a period equal to or longer than a product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number.

  According to the feature F3, when the game replay operation is performed over the second operation period, a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means in a situation where the game replay operation is being performed. It is possible to do so. This makes it possible to cause a situation where a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

  Feature F4. The second operation period is a period that is equal to or longer than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and the predetermined number, and is a period that is less than the product of the shortest ball entry cycle and a number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized by the following.

  According to the feature F4, in a case where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means and the predetermined information is executed and the game replay operation is executed over the second operation period, the game replay operation is performed. The predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information can be stored in the predetermined information storage means in a situation where the game operation is being executed, while the special ball entry unit is in a situation where the game round operation is being executed. It is possible to prevent more than a predetermined number of game balls from entering.

  Feature F5. When a game ball is supplied to the special ball entry section in the shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and the game replay operation triggered by the predetermined information that does not correspond to the provision correspondence information is repeatedly executed. Until the game repetition operation is executed a predetermined number of times, the game repetition operation in the first operation period is executed, and in the next execution time, the game repetition operation in the second operation period is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the first operation period and the second operation period are set as described above.

  According to the feature F5, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle, and the game turning operation triggered by the predetermined information that does not correspond to the provision correspondence information is repeatedly executed. In such a case, a situation occurs in which the game operation for the first operation period is executed a predetermined number of times, and then the game operation for the second operation period is executed once. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game replay operation is enhanced in order to prevent a situation in which the predetermined information is not obtained despite the occurrence of a ball entry to the special ball entry section, the game replay operation is performed. Can be periodically generated for a certain period of time, and it is possible to make the effect execution mode preferable.

  Feature F6. Means for executing a predetermined effect when the game replay operation is performed over the second operation period (a function of executing the processing of steps S2105 to S2110 in the MPU 123). The gaming machine according to Feature F5.

  According to the feature F6, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game replay operation is increased in order to prevent a situation in which the predetermined information is not obtained despite the occurrence of a ball entering the predetermined ball entry section, Thus, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F6, one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6. May be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature F group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  For pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry area provided in the game area, and the display of the pattern is displayed on the display device. In such a case, there is known a configuration in which a transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player when the game state becomes. Then, in the case of transition to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary for the progress of the game to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a region; and a bonus granted to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  A spinning-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: provided with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures is started by operation of a start operation means, and caused by operation of a stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of pictures is stopped by a predetermined time or after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

  Reference numeral 10: pachinko machine, 33: first special drawing prize winning device, 34: second special drawing prize winning device, 35: special prize winning device, 36: through prize winning portion, 46: general drawing display portion, 61: branch entrance, 65 ... branch Passageway, 65c: first derivation area, 65d: second derivation area, 66a: branch winning detection sensor, 67: switching piece, 71: first distribution mechanism, 72: second distribution mechanism, 107: payout control device, 112 ... MPU, 123 ... MPU, 134 ... Second special figure reservation area, 142 ... Special winning section, 151 ... Guiding section, 153 ... Second guiding rail, 155 ... Special winning section, 156 ... Fourth guiding rail, 161 ... Third distribution mechanism, 162: Fourth distribution mechanism, 163: guidance unit, PA: game area.

Claims (2)

A specific ball entry section in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
A predetermined ball entry portion provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a second state in which game balls cannot enter ;
When a switching opportunity is generated based on a game ball having entered the specific ball entry section, the predetermined ball entry section is changed from the second state to the first state, and the predetermined state is the first state. Means capable of causing the predetermined ball entry section to be in the second state in response to a game ball having entered the ball entry section;
Any one of a plurality of types of distribution directions including a first distribution direction and a second distribution direction, in which the supplied game ball is provided on the upstream side of the specific ball entry portion and the predetermined ball entry portion in the game area. Distribution means for sequentially changing the distribution direction when the game balls are supplied, and
With
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied to the specific entering ball portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. In such a case, a game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entry section,
A configuration in which a game ball supplied to the distribution unit after one game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution unit is distributed in the first distribution direction,
The time required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where a game ball can enter the specific ball entry portion from a predetermined height position is the distribution time. Means that the game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the means is longer than a period required from the predetermined height position to reach a position where the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion. A gaming machine, wherein a path configuration from a distributing unit to the specific ball entry unit and a path configuration from the distribution unit to the predetermined ball entry unit are set. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images